Initial commit - Typo3 11.5.41
This commit is contained in:
Matteo Gallo
427
typo3conf/l10n/it/context_help/4.5/it.locallang_csh_pages.xlf
Normal file
427
typo3conf/l10n/it/context_help/4.5/it.locallang_csh_pages.xlf
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,427 @@
|
||||
<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
|
||||
<xliff xmlns:t3="http://typo3.org/schemas/xliff" version="1.0">
|
||||
<file t3:id="1415814793" source-language="en" datatype="plaintext" original="messages" date="2011-10-17T20:22:32Z" product-name="context_help" target-language="it">
|
||||
<header/>
|
||||
<body>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="layout.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>The Frontend Layout can change the way a page design appears.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Il Layout di Frontend può cambiare l'aspetto di una pagina.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="layout.details" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>This option may not have any impact on the Frontend page design since it depends on whether the Frontend template uses it. Most templates do not use it.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Questa opzione potrebbe non avere alcun impatto sul design della pagina di Frontend dato che dipende dal fatto che il template di Frontend la usi o meno. La maggior parte dei template non la usano.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="doktype.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Page Type determines whether the page is normal webpage, a shortcut to another webpage, or used in other internal ways.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Il Page Type determina se la pagina è una normale pagina web, un collegamento ad una pagina web esterna o un collegamento ad una pagina interna.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="doktype.details" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>'Standard' is the most common Page Type and is used for normal webpages.
|
||||
'Backend User Section' is an option which creates pages that are only visible in the Frontend for Backend users who are logged in.
|
||||
|
||||
<b>Link</b>
|
||||
'Shortcut' pages jump to another page in the Pagetree.
|
||||
'Mount Point' pages bring content from another branch of the Pagetree into the current branch.
|
||||
'Link to External URL' is similar to 'Shortcut' but points to external URLs instead of TYPO3 pages.
|
||||
|
||||
<b>Special</b>
|
||||
'Folder' is a page type which is not shown as a webpage but is instead stores records of your choice.
|
||||
'Recycler' is a garbage can. Pages and records in the Recycler are not visible in the Frontend.
|
||||
'Menu Separator' is only useful if your Frontend memus are programmed to use it. It does not represent a page with content but is intended to be an unclickable placeholder in the menu.
|
||||
|
||||
<b>Notice</b> Each Page Type is represented by a unique icon. The available page types can be restricted for users so all of the options described above may not be visible. Finally, particuilar record typoes may only be allowed on certain page types, but any record can be placed in a 'Folder.'</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">'Standard' indica un tipo comune di pagina ed è usato per le pagine web normali.
|
||||
'Backend User Section' (Sezione Utente di Backend) è una opzine che crea pagine che saranno visibili nel Frontend destinate agli utenti di Backand che hanno fatto login.
|
||||
|
||||
<b>Link</b>
|
||||
Pagine di tipo 'Shortcut' sevono come scorciatoia o segnaposto per saltare a un'altra pagina dell'albero dellle pagine.
|
||||
'Mount Point' prendono il contenuto da un'altro ramo dell'albero delle pagine e lo rendono disponibile nell'attuale ramo.
|
||||
'Link a URL esterno' è simile a 'Shortcut' ma punta a un URL esterno invece che ad una pagina dell'albero.
|
||||
|
||||
<b>Special</b>
|
||||
'Folder' è una pagina che non viene vista come una pagina web ma in luogo serve per memorizzare records.
|
||||
'Recycler' è un cestino. Le pagine inserire nel cestino non saranno visibli nel Frontend.
|
||||
'Separatore di menu' è utile solo se i menu di Frontend sono programmati per utilizzarlo. Non raoppresenta una pagina che ha dei contenuti; bensì è un segnaposto non cliccabile che si trova tra i menu.
|
||||
|
||||
<b>Nota</b> Ogni tipo di pagina è rappresentato da una specifica icona. Le pagine disponibili possono esserre ristrette agli utenti cosicchè molte opzioni descritte sopra possono non essere disponibili. Infine particolari tipi di record possono non essere permessi in certi tipi di pagina, ma qualunque tipo di record può venir memorizzato in un 'Folder'.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_doktype.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>pages:shortcut,
|
||||
pages:url</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">pages:shortcut,
|
||||
pages:url</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="hidden.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>If this is checked, the page will be disabled on the website.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Se selezionato, la pagina sarà disabilitata nel sito web</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="hidden.details" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>The 'Disable,' 'Start,' 'Stop,' and 'Access' options are all about limiting access to pages and are thus related in functionality. When a page is not visible due to one of these options, the page will not show up in the site navigation.
|
||||
Notice, these options are related <em>only</em> to the page for which they are set. If you want their effect to cover the subpages as well, you must enable the 'Extend to Subpages' option.
|
||||
When you're logged in as a Backend user you can preview disabled pages if you have read access to them.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Le opzioni "Disabilitare", "Avviare", "Stop", "Accesso" sono tutte relative a limitare l'accesso alle pagine e sono quindi legate a questa funzionalità. Quando una pagina non è visibile a causa di una di queste opzioni, la pagina non verrà visualizzata nella navigazione del sito.
|
||||
Avviso, queste opzioni sono correlate <em>solo</em> alla pagina per quale sono impostate. Se si desidera estendere queste opzioni alle sottopagine, è necessario abilitare l'opzione "Estendi alle sottopagine".
|
||||
Quando si è registrati come utente backend è possibile visualizzare le pagine disabilitate se si ha l'accesso in lettura delle pagine.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_hidden.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>pages:starttime,pages:endtime,pages:fe_group,pages:extendToSubpages</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">pages:starttime,pages:endtime,pages:fe_group,pages:extendToSubpages</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_hidden.image" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>EXT:context_help/cshimages/hidden_page.gif,
|
||||
EXT:context_help/cshimages/pages_1.png</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">EXT:context_help/cshimages/hidden_page.gif,
|
||||
EXT:context_help/cshimages/pages_1.png</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="hidden.image_descr" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>The page icon of a disabled page is dimmed and a red X is added.
|
||||
If you view a page that is hidden and you are logged in into the Backend you will still be able to see the page. The red "Preview" box will tell you that this page is visible to you because of this special circumstance.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">L'icona di una pagina disabilitata sarà grigia ed è sovrapposta una X rossa.
|
||||
Se è presente una pagina nascosta e sei loggato nel Backend, puoi comunque vedere la pagina. L'avviso rosso di antemprima (Preview) ti avvisa che la pagina è visibile solo a te, in quanto amministratore del sito.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="starttime.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>The Publish Date determines when the page will be visible online. If the Publish Date is not set, the page will be available immediately.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">La Data di Pubblicazione determina quando la pagina sarà visibile online. se la Data di Pubblicazione non viene indicata, la pagina sarà disponibile immediatamente.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="starttime.syntax" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>The Publish Date Format is either DD-MM-YYYY or MM-DD-YYYY depending on how TYPO3 is configured. There are also several shortcuts you can use when entering the date.
|
||||
If you insert a 'd' the current date will be inserted. You can also append any value in the field with a number such as '+10' which will add 10 days to the current value. For example, entering 'd+10' would result in a date 10 days from now.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Il Formato della Data di Pubblicazione può essere GG-MM-AAAA oppure MM-GG-AAAA dipende da come è configurato TYPO3. Ci sono inoltre diverse scorciatoie per inserire la data.
|
||||
Se inserisci un 'd' la data odierna verrà inserita. Puoi anche inserire un qualsiasi valore nel campo con un numero, come '+10' aggiungerà 10 giorni alla data odierna. Esempio, se inserisci 'd+10' il risultato sarà 10 giorni dalla data odierna.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_starttime.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>pages:endtime,pages:hidden</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">pages:endtime,pages:hidden</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>tt_content</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">tt_content</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="endtime.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>The Expiration Date specifies when the page will no longer be visible online.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">La Data di Scadenza specifica quando la pagina non sarà più visibile online.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="endtime.syntax" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>See Page / Publication Date (click below)</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Visualizza la Pagina / Data di Pubblicazione (clicca qui sotto)</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_endtime.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>pages:starttime</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">pages:starttime</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="fe_group.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>If Usergroup Access Rights is set to a usergroup name, only website users who are members of the selected usergroup will be able to view the page. The special option 'Hide at Login' means the page will <em>not</em> be visible for any website users that are logged in. Likewise "Show at Any Login" will make the page visible for any logged in Frontend user.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Se il Permesso di Accesso del gruppo utenti è settato ad uno specifico gruppo, solo gli utenti di frontend che sono membri del gruppo saranno abilitati a vedere la pagina. L'opzione speciale 'Nascondi al login' indica che la pagina <em>non</em> sarà visibile ad alcun utente di frontend che non è loggato. Allo stesso modo 'Mostra ad ogni login' renderà la pagina visibile a chiunque sia loggato da frontend.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_fe_group.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>fe_groups</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">fe_groups</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_fe_group.image" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>EXT:context_help/cshimages/fegroups_4.png</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">EXT:context_help/cshimages/fegroups_4.png</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="extendToSubpages.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>By default the Publication Date, Expiration Date, Usergroup Access Rights, and Page Visibility options <em>only</em> affect the page where they are set. If the option 'Extend to Subpages' is checked for the page, then all subpages are affected as well.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Di base le opzioni della Data di Pubblicazione, la Data di Scadenza, gli Accessi degli Usergroup, e la Visibilità della Pagina hanno effetto <em>solo</em> se vengono impostate nella pagina. Se l'opzione "Estendi alle Sottopagine" è spuntata per la pagina, tutte le sottopagine subiranno le impostazioni della pagina madre.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="extendToSubpages.details" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Consider a scenario where you want to create a section of subpages that are only visible for logged in users. Setting the Usergroup Access Rights for the top page in the section would remove the page from menus if no user was logged in.
|
||||
However, the subpage could still be accessed by guessing the ID number of the page and entering it manually in the URL. Setting the 'Extend to Subpages' option would extend the Usergroup Access Rights from the top page through all subpages as well.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Considera lo scenario dove vuoi crare una sezione di sottopagine che siano visibili solo ad utenti loggati. Settando i Permessi di Accesso del gruppo utente per la pagina principale della sezione, rimuoverà la pagina dai menu se nessun utente è loggato.
|
||||
Comunque la sottopagina sarà ancora accessibile indicando l'ID di pagina ed inserendolo manualmente nell'URL. Spuntando l'opzione 'Estendi alle sottopagine' si estenderanno i diritti di accesso del gruppo utenti dalla pagina principale a tutte le sottopagine.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_extendToSubpages.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>pages:hidden,
|
||||
pages:starttime,
|
||||
pages:endtime,
|
||||
pages:fe_group</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">pages:hidden,
|
||||
pages:starttime,
|
||||
pages:endtime,
|
||||
pages:fe_group</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_extendToSubpages.image" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>EXT:context_help/cshimages/pages_2.png</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">EXT:context_help/cshimages/pages_2.png</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="extendToSubpages.image_descr" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>This page has access restricted to a certain group and has "Extend to Subpages" set as well. This is reflected in the way the page icon has changed.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">L'accesso alla pagina non è consentito a determinati gruppi e è impostato anche 'Estendi alle sottopagine'. Questo risulta anche dall'icona di pagina che è cambiata.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="alias.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>A URL Alias is a unique identification string for a page. You can use this string instead of the ID number to refer to the page.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Un URL Alias è un identificatore univoco per la pagina. Puoi usare questa stringa invece dell'ID per far riferimento alla pagina.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="alias.details" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Ultimately a page is identified by its ID number. For example, you may access a page in TYPO3 at '.../?id=123'. If the page with ID '123' has the URL Alias 'one_two_three', then the URL '.../?id=one_two_three' would display exactly the same page, because 'one_two_three' is a URL Alias for the ID '123'.
|
||||
URL Aliases are normally assigned to only the most frequently used pages rather than all pages. In most TYPO3 configurations you would be able to use the syntax '.. &lt;link one_two_three&gt;go to the page&lt;/link&gt; ..' to create a link to the page. This is easier to remember.
|
||||
Another use is if you need to change which page a commonly used link points to. In this case you can delete the URL Alias for the original page and re-add it on the new page. All links using the URL Alias would now refer to the new page and its ID number.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Una pagina è identificata dal suo ID. Per esempio puoi accedere ad una pagina in TYPO3 con '../?id=123'. Se la pagina con ID '123' ha come URL Alias 'uno_due_tre' allora l'URL '.../?id=uno_due_tre' visualizzerà esattamente la stessa pagina, perchè 'uno_due_tre' è un URL Alias per l'ID '123'.
|
||||
Gli URL Alias sono normalmente assegnati alle pagine più frequentate piuttosto che a tutte le pagine. Nella maggior parte delle configurazioni TYPO3 potrete usare la sintassi '.. &lt;link uno_due_tre&gt;vai alla pagina&lt;/link&gt; ..' per creare un link alla pagina. Questo è più facile da ricordare.
|
||||
Un altro uso è se devi cambiare il link della pagina a cui solitamente punta. In questo caso puoi cancellare l'URL Alias della pagina originale e riaggiungerlo alla nuova pagina. Tutti i link che stanno usando l'URL Alias da adesso faranno riferimento alla nuova pagina e al suo ID.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="alias.syntax" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>A URL Alias can contain only lowercase alphanumeric characters and must be unique.
|
||||
Please note: If the URL Alias already exists in the site, it will have a number added to the end of it.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Un URL Alias può contenere caratteri minuscoli alfanumerici e deve essere unico.
|
||||
Notare: Se l'URL Alias esiste già nel sito, avrà un numero aggiunto alla fine di esso.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="target.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>This sets the default Link Target for menu items linking to this page. Can also used to open the page as a popup window.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Questo imposta il Link Target di default per le voci di menu che hanno un link a questa pagina. Può anche essere usato per aprire la pagina come una finestra popup.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="target.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>The Link Target overrides the default Link Target behavior, which should already be configured correctly for most pages in the website TypoScript template.
|
||||
There are additional options available by using the Link Target field
|
||||
|
||||
Setting an integer value at the beginning of the field sets it as the default type for the page.
|
||||
For example, if an RSS feed is configured in TypoScript as typeNum=100, setting the Link Target to 100 could be used to add an RSS link in the menu.
|
||||
|
||||
The following syntax is used to open the page in a popup window:
|
||||
400x200 - Opens the page in a 400x200 popup window.
|
||||
230x450:resizable=0,location=1 - Opens the page in a 230x450 popup window that is not resizable and has an address bar.
|
||||
|
||||
Combined:
|
||||
100 600x350 - Opens the page in a 600x350 popup with type=100
|
||||
2 _blank - Opens the page with target "_blank" and type=2</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="no_cache.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>This option disables server caching of the page.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Questa opzione disabilita il caching lato server della pagina.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="no_cache.details" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Normally pages in TYPO3 are cached on the server after being constructed for the first time. This means a page is displayed much faster the second time it's requested.
|
||||
For most pages this presents no problems; indeed, it boosts the performance of the website.
|
||||
However you may need to disable caching for a page if it contains dynamic content which must not be cached under any circumstances. Normally the PHP-code rendering such content is programmed to disable the caching automatically. But with this option you can force the page not to be cached.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Di norma le pagine in TYPO3 vengono scritte nella memoria del server (Cache) dopo essere state composte per la prima volta. Questo significa che una pagina quando viene pubblicata per la seconda volta e successive, sarà molto più veloce da scaricare da parte del visitatore.
|
||||
Per la maggior parte delle pagine non ci sono problemi con la memoria Cache; le prestazioni migliorano sensibilmente.
|
||||
Comunque in alcuni casi puoi disabilitare la memorizzazione nella Cache, ad esempio quando deve essere visualizzato del contenuto dinamico. Normalmente il codice PHP per ll rendering è programmato per disabilitare il caching automaticamente. Ma con questa opzione puoi forzare la pagina a non essere conservata in cache.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_no_cache.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>pages:cache_timeout</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">pages:cache_timeout</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="cache_timeout.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Sets the Cache Lifetime for the page.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Definisce la durata della pagina da conservare in Cache.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="cache_timeout.details" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>By default, pages are cached for 24 hours. After 24 hours, the page is constructed again and rewritten to the cache. Depending on your configuration, the cache may be cleared at midnight.
|
||||
When specific pages need a longer or shorter cache lifetime than the default, this option can be used.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Per default le pagine durano in cache per 24 ore. Dopo 24 ore la pagina viene rigenerata e scritta nuovamente in cache. Dipende dalla configurazione del tuo sito; la cache può essere cancellata a mezzanotte.
|
||||
Puoi usare questa opzione per pagine specifiche che necessitano di una permanenza in cache superiore al tempo di <i>default</i>.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_cache_timeout.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>pages:no_cache</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">pages:no_cache</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="no_search.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>If enabled, this option excludes the page from searching operations on the website.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Se abilitata, questa opzione esclude la pagina dalle operazioni di indicizzazione per la ricerca nel sito web.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="author.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter the page author's name.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Inserisci il nome dell'autore della pagina</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="author.details" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Whether the author name is used or not depends on the setup of your TypoScript template.
|
||||
|
||||
- You may use it in a meta-tag.
|
||||
- If you're using TYPO3 pages as 'articles' then you could use this field to display the name of the page (article) author.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Se viene usato il nome dell'autore o non dipende da opzioni di configurazione passate dal template di Typoscript.
|
||||
|
||||
- puoi usarlo nei meta-tage.
|
||||
- se stai utilizzando pagine di TYPO3 come 'articoli' allora puoi usare questo campo per visualizzare il nome dell'autore della pagina-articolo.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_author.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>pages:author_email</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">pages:author_email</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="author_email.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter the page author's email address.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Inserisci l'indirizzo e-mail dell'autore della pagina.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_author_email.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>pages:author</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">pages:author</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="module.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Define the page as containing a Frontend plugin.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Definisce la pagina come contenitore per un plugin di Frontend.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="module.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Setting this option lets the Backend knows this page contains specific content or has a specific purpose, such as containing a forum or acting as the root page of a shop section on the website. Based on this setting the Backend is able to display a shortcut list as well as relevant functionality in the 'Web>Modules' module. The Frontend display is largely not affected.
|
||||
Marking a page as containing a 'Shop' plugin simply means it'll show up in the shortcut list of modules in the backend.
|
||||
|
||||
For additional details on this option, refer to the administration documentation.
|
||||
|
||||
It's recommended that only admin-users have access to this field!</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="media.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Attach media files related to the page.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">File media in allegato relazionali alla pagina.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="media.details" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>This field allows you to attach various files to the page, but how these files are used depends on your template.
|
||||
As an example the template could be use this field to allow a logo to be attached to the page or it might expect the first file to be an image used as a link in the navigation menu. Remember, this totally depends on how the template is programmed.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Questo campo permette di allegare diversi file alla pagina; tuttavia il loro utilizzo dipende dal template Typoscript
|
||||
Per esempio il template potrebbe utilizzare questo campo come logo per la pagina oppure utilizzare il primo file di tipo immagine come link nel menu di navigazione. In ogni caso, l'utilizzo di queste informazioni dipende esclusivamente dal template.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="subtitle.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter a subtitle if needed.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Inserisci un sottotitolo, se necessario.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="subtitle.details" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Whether this field is used or not depends on the template. In most cases it's not used.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">L'utilizzo di questo campo dipende o meno dal template in uso. In molti casi non viene usato.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="url.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter the URL this page redirects to.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Inserisci l'URL della pagina alla quale effettuare la redirezione.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="url.details" xml:space="preserve" approved="no">
|
||||
<source>For example, 'http://www.typo3.org' or just 'www.typo3.org' if the 'Protocol' selector is set to 'http://'.
|
||||
Use the 'Protocol' selector to select a prefix for the URL.
|
||||
|
||||
This option is used only if the page 'Type' is set to 'Link to External URL.'</source>
|
||||
<target state="needs-translation">Per esempio 'http://www.typo3.org' o il solo 'www.typo3.org' se il selettore 'Protocollo' e' configurato come 'http://'.
|
||||
Utilizzare il selettore 'Protocollo' per indicare il prefisso dell'URL.
|
||||
|
||||
Questa opzione viene usata solo se il tipo di pagina scelto è 'Collegamento a Url esterno'.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_url.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>pages:urltype</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">pages:urltype</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="shortcut.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Select a page to act as the Shortcut Target. When the current page is requested in the Frontend, it will be redirected to the Shortcut Target.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Selezionare una pagina che agirà come destinazione per la scorciatoia (Shortcut). Quando la pagina corrente sarà richiesta nel frontent, typo3 effettuerà una redirezione alla pagina di destinazione (shortcut target).</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="shortcut.details" xml:space="preserve" approved="no">
|
||||
<source>Click the 'Browse for Records' icon and a new window will appear in which you can easily select a page to act as the Shortcut Target.
|
||||
|
||||
This option is used only if the page 'Type' is set to 'Shortcut.'</source>
|
||||
<target state="needs-translation">Clicca l'icona 'Naviga nei records' e una nuova finestra sarà visualizzata, con la quale potrai scegliere in modo semplice la pagina di destinazione della scorciatoia (Shortcut Target).
|
||||
|
||||
Questa opzione è disponibile solo se il tipo di pagina è 'scorciatoia' (Shortcut).</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_shortcut.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>pages:doktype,
|
||||
pages:shortcut_mode</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">pages:doktype,
|
||||
pages:shortcut_mode</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_shortcut.image" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>EXT:context_help/cshimages/page_shortcut.gif</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">EXT:context_help/cshimages/page_shortcut.gif</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="shortcut.image_descr" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Select a Shortcut Target page with the Element Browser.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Selezionare la pagina di destinazione (Shortcut Target) attravero il navigatore (element browser).</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="keywords.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter keywords for the page separated by commas. You may also use short phrases.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Inserisci le parole-chiave (keywords) per la pagina separate da virgole. E' possibile utilizzare anche frasi brevi.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="keywords.details" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Most TYPO3 websites use these keywords in a meta-tag on the page, but you may have to setup the appropriate TypoScript template yourself.
|
||||
|
||||
To optimize your page for search engines like Google you should not use more than 3 to 6 keywords. You should also make sure that the keywords are found in the content of the page.
|
||||
|
||||
Note that search engine extensions for TYPO3 such as Indexed Search can also be configured to make use of the keywords.
|
||||
|
||||
The keywords can also be used to create a menu of related pages. Create a Content Element of type 'Sitemap' and then choose the menu type <i>Related pages (based on keywords)</i>.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Diversi siti con TYPO3 usano queste parole chiave nei meta-tag di pagina, ma tu puoi disporre anche di una diversa configurazione nel template di Typoscript.
|
||||
|
||||
Per ottimizzare la pagina ai fini dei motori di ricerca come Google non dovresti usare più di 3-6 parolel chiave. Dovresti anche accertarti che le parole chiave siano pubblicate nella pagina corrente.
|
||||
|
||||
Nota che alcune estensioni per implementare un motore di ricerca interno al sito, come ad esempio l'estensione 'Indexed Search' possono essere configurate per l'uso di queste parole chiave.
|
||||
|
||||
Le parole chiave possono anche essere usate per creare un meno di pagine relazionate. Per farlo basta creare un tipo di contenuto come 'mappa del sito' (Sitemap) e scegliere dal menu a tendina il tipo <i>Pagine relazionate (basate sulle parole chiave)</i>.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_keywords.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>pages:description</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">pages:description</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="description.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter a short description of the page. It will be displayed in the result lists of most search engines.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Inserire una breve descrizione della pagina. Sarò visualizzata tra i risultati della ricerca elencate in vari motori.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="description.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Most websites insert this description in a meta-tag on the page, but you may have to configure this yourself in your TypoScript template.
|
||||
|
||||
Most search engines will display the description in their result list. Thus, the text should be short (about 160 characters maximum), and its wording should make sense when it shows up in the result list.
|
||||
|
||||
In addition, the description will be displayed if you create a Content Element of type 'Sitemap' and then choose the menu type <i>Menu of subpages to these pages (with abstract)</i>. If an abstract exists for the page, it will be used instead of the description.
|
||||
|
||||
<b>Note:</b> Some search engines only use the description if the text is not found elsewhere in the content. So do not just repeat yourself.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_description.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>pages:keywords
|
||||
pages:abstract</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">pages:keywords
|
||||
pages:abstract</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="abstract.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter an abstract of the contents. It may be displayed in an overview of articles.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Inserire un abstract dei contenuti. Potrà essere visualizzato in una anteprima degli articoli.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="abstract.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>An abstract is a short description of the page content that might be a little longer than the one in the <i>Description</i> field.
|
||||
|
||||
Unlike the description, the abstract is not meant for display in search engine result lists, but is instead intended for you own use.
|
||||
|
||||
If you create a Content Element of type <i>Sitemap</i> and then choose <i>Menu of subpages to these pages (with abstract)</i> an overview of pages will be created. If an abstract is available for a page it will be used instead of the description.
|
||||
|
||||
<b>Note:</b> You do not have to enter the text of the description into the <i>Abstract field</i> again.
|
||||
|
||||
Admins can also make custom use of this field via their TypoScript templates.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_abstract.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>pages:description</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">pages:description</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="newUntil.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter the date at which this page is no longer considered new.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Inserisci la data a partire dalla quale la pagina non sarà più considerata come 'nuova'.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="newUntil.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>The 'New Until' date of the page has no effect on the display of the webpage. This value is instead for internal use as a reminder of the date when the content of this page should be revised. If the content of the page will become outdated on a certain day, you could set this value to that approximate date.
|
||||
To get an overview of when pages will be outdated, use the 'Pagetree overview' in the 'Web>Info' Module.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="newUntil.syntax" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>See Page / Publication Date (click below)</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Vedi la Pagina / Data di Pubblicazione (clicca sotto)</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_newUntil.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>pages:starttime</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">pages:starttime</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="lastUpdated.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Enter the date and time of the most recent update to this page.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="lastUpdated.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>How the value of this field is used is determined by the TypoScript template of the website. 'Last Update' content needs to be inserted on the pages and the TypoScript template must be configured to use this value.
|
||||
The most common use is to display the date from the automatically updated 'tstamp' field <em>unless</em> the 'Last Update' field is set. In this case, the date in 'Last Update' is used.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="lastUpdated.syntax" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>The format is HH:MM DD-MM-YYYY or HH:MM MM-DD-YYYY depending on your TYPO3 configuration.
|
||||
If you insert a 'd' the current time and date is inserted. You can also append any value in the field with a number lie '+10' which will add 10 days to the current value.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="nav_hide.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>With this option the page will be not appear in menus in the Frontend. The page can still be viewed if linked by going directly to its URL.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_nav_hide.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>pages:nav_title</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">pages:nav_title</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="nav_title.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Alternative Navigation Title for menu items in the Frontend. When set, this value is used instead of the Page Title.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="content_from_pid.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>If set, this is an alternative page to select Content Elements from.
|
||||
Whether this field is used depends on the website's TypoScript template.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="urltype.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Set the Protocol for the URL.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Configura il protocollo per l'URL</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="shortcut_mode.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Select a Shortcut Mode. By default the shortcut page must have a Shortcut Target to jump to. Other options are to go to the first subpage, to a random subpage, or back up to the parent page.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="mount_pid.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Mount this page. If set, subpages of this page come from the Mounted Page instead.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="mount_pid.details" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>In the Frontend this is done by adding a new variable, &MP, to the URL. This links the mounted branch to the main branch by pairing page ids.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Nel frontend questo viene fatto aggiungendo una nuova variabile, &MP, all'URL. Questo stabilisce un collegamento tra il ramo montato (mounted branch) e quello principale tramite due id di pagina.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_mount_pid.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>pages:mount_pid_ol</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">pages:mount_pid_ol</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="mount_pid_ol.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Show content for the current page or replace it completely with the Mounted Page.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Mostra il contenuto della pagina corrente o lo sostituiscilo completamente con quello della pagina montata (Mounted Page).</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_mount_pid_ol.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>pages:mount_pid</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">pages:mount_pid</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="title.description.+" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>This is normally shown in the website navigation.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Questo è normalmente visualizzato nella navigazione del sito web.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="TSconfig.details.+" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source><strong>Example:</strong>
|
||||
The 'Web>Page' module lets you create content in four columns, Left, Normal, Right, Border if the template has been configured to use this option. (However, most websites use only one or two columns so some of these content columns are just taking up space and confusing users.)
|
||||
If you enter this string in the 'TSConfig' field, the 'Web>Page' Module will only show the 'Normal' and 'Border' column!
|
||||
|
||||
<em>mod.web_layout.tt_content.colPos_list = 0,3</em>
|
||||
|
||||
(Must be entered in a single line!)</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="l18n_cfg.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Affect availability of pages in the various languages.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Influenza la disponibilità delle pagine nelle varie lingue</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="l18n_cfg.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source><b>Hide default translation of page</b>
|
||||
If set, the page is only available in translated versions and not in the default language. Any attempt to access the page in the default language will result in an error message.
|
||||
|
||||
<b>Hide page if no translation for current language exists</b>
|
||||
If set, any attempt to access the page in a translation that does not exist will result in an error message. By default, accessing an untranslated page will just show the default language instead.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
</body>
|
||||
</file>
|
||||
</xliff>
|
||||
140
typo3conf/l10n/it/context_help/4.5/it.locallang_csh_pages.xml
Normal file
140
typo3conf/l10n/it/context_help/4.5/it.locallang_csh_pages.xml
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,140 @@
|
||||
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
|
||||
<T3locallangExt>
|
||||
<data type="array">
|
||||
<languageKey index="it" type="array">
|
||||
<label index="layout.description">Il Layout di Frontend può cambiare l'aspetto di una pagina.</label>
|
||||
<label index="layout.details">Questa opzione potrebbe non avere alcun impatto sul design della pagina di Frontend dato che dipende dal fatto che il template di Frontend la usi o meno. La maggior parte dei template non la usano.</label>
|
||||
<label index="doktype.description">Il Page Type determina se la pagina è una normale pagina web, un collegamento ad una pagina web esterna o un collegamento ad una pagina interna.</label>
|
||||
<label index="doktype.details">'Standard' indica un tipo comune di pagina ed è usato per le pagine web normali.
|
||||
'Backend User Section' (Sezione Utente di Backend) è una opzine che crea pagine che saranno visibili nel Frontend destinate agli utenti di Backand che hanno fatto login.
|
||||
|
||||
<b>Link</b>
|
||||
Pagine di tipo 'Shortcut' sevono come scorciatoia o segnaposto per saltare a un'altra pagina dell'albero dellle pagine.
|
||||
'Mount Point' prendono il contenuto da un'altro ramo dell'albero delle pagine e lo rendono disponibile nell'attuale ramo.
|
||||
'Link a URL esterno' è simile a 'Shortcut' ma punta a un URL esterno invece che ad una pagina dell'albero.
|
||||
|
||||
<b>Special</b>
|
||||
'Folder' è una pagina che non viene vista come una pagina web ma in luogo serve per memorizzare records.
|
||||
'Recycler' è un cestino. Le pagine inserire nel cestino non saranno visibli nel Frontend.
|
||||
'Separatore di menu' è utile solo se i menu di Frontend sono programmati per utilizzarlo. Non raoppresenta una pagina che ha dei contenuti; bensì è un segnaposto non cliccabile che si trova tra i menu.
|
||||
|
||||
<b>Nota</b> Ogni tipo di pagina è rappresentato da una specifica icona. Le pagine disponibili possono esserre ristrette agli utenti cosicchè molte opzioni descritte sopra possono non essere disponibili. Infine particolari tipi di record possono non essere permessi in certi tipi di pagina, ma qualunque tipo di record può venir memorizzato in un 'Folder'.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_doktype.seeAlso">pages:shortcut,
|
||||
pages:url</label>
|
||||
<label index="hidden.description">Se selezionato, la pagina sarà disabilitata nel sito web</label>
|
||||
<label index="hidden.details">Le opzioni "Disabilitare", "Avviare", "Stop", "Accesso" sono tutte relative a limitare l'accesso alle pagine e sono quindi legate a questa funzionalità. Quando una pagina non è visibile a causa di una di queste opzioni, la pagina non verrà visualizzata nella navigazione del sito.
|
||||
Avviso, queste opzioni sono correlate <em>solo</em> alla pagina per quale sono impostate. Se si desidera estendere queste opzioni alle sottopagine, è necessario abilitare l'opzione "Estendi alle sottopagine".
|
||||
Quando si è registrati come utente backend è possibile visualizzare le pagine disabilitate se si ha l'accesso in lettura delle pagine.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_hidden.seeAlso">pages:starttime,pages:endtime,pages:fe_group,pages:extendToSubpages</label>
|
||||
<label index="_hidden.image">EXT:context_help/cshimages/hidden_page.gif,
|
||||
EXT:context_help/cshimages/pages_1.png</label>
|
||||
<label index="hidden.image_descr">L'icona di una pagina disabilitata sarà grigia ed è sovrapposta una X rossa.
|
||||
Se è presente una pagina nascosta e sei loggato nel Backend, puoi comunque vedere la pagina. L'avviso rosso di antemprima (Preview) ti avvisa che la pagina è visibile solo a te, in quanto amministratore del sito.</label>
|
||||
<label index="starttime.description">La Data di Pubblicazione determina quando la pagina sarà visibile online. se la Data di Pubblicazione non viene indicata, la pagina sarà disponibile immediatamente.</label>
|
||||
<label index="starttime.syntax">Il Formato della Data di Pubblicazione può essere GG-MM-AAAA oppure MM-GG-AAAA dipende da come è configurato TYPO3. Ci sono inoltre diverse scorciatoie per inserire la data.
|
||||
Se inserisci un 'd' la data odierna verrà inserita. Puoi anche inserire un qualsiasi valore nel campo con un numero, come '+10' aggiungerà 10 giorni alla data odierna. Esempio, se inserisci 'd+10' il risultato sarà 10 giorni dalla data odierna.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_starttime.seeAlso">pages:endtime,pages:hidden</label>
|
||||
<label index="_.seeAlso">tt_content</label>
|
||||
<label index="endtime.description">La Data di Scadenza specifica quando la pagina non sarà più visibile online.</label>
|
||||
<label index="endtime.syntax">Visualizza la Pagina / Data di Pubblicazione (clicca qui sotto)</label>
|
||||
<label index="_endtime.seeAlso">pages:starttime</label>
|
||||
<label index="fe_group.description">Se il Permesso di Accesso del gruppo utenti è settato ad uno specifico gruppo, solo gli utenti di frontend che sono membri del gruppo saranno abilitati a vedere la pagina. L'opzione speciale 'Nascondi al login' indica che la pagina <em>non</em> sarà visibile ad alcun utente di frontend che non è loggato. Allo stesso modo 'Mostra ad ogni login' renderà la pagina visibile a chiunque sia loggato da frontend.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_fe_group.seeAlso">fe_groups</label>
|
||||
<label index="_fe_group.image">EXT:context_help/cshimages/fegroups_4.png</label>
|
||||
<label index="extendToSubpages.description">Di base le opzioni della Data di Pubblicazione, la Data di Scadenza, gli Accessi degli Usergroup, e la Visibilità della Pagina hanno effetto <em>solo</em> se vengono impostate nella pagina. Se l'opzione "Estendi alle Sottopagine" è spuntata per la pagina, tutte le sottopagine subiranno le impostazioni della pagina madre.</label>
|
||||
<label index="extendToSubpages.details">Considera lo scenario dove vuoi crare una sezione di sottopagine che siano visibili solo ad utenti loggati. Settando i Permessi di Accesso del gruppo utente per la pagina principale della sezione, rimuoverà la pagina dai menu se nessun utente è loggato.
|
||||
Comunque la sottopagina sarà ancora accessibile indicando l'ID di pagina ed inserendolo manualmente nell'URL. Spuntando l'opzione 'Estendi alle sottopagine' si estenderanno i diritti di accesso del gruppo utenti dalla pagina principale a tutte le sottopagine.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_extendToSubpages.seeAlso">pages:hidden,
|
||||
pages:starttime,
|
||||
pages:endtime,
|
||||
pages:fe_group</label>
|
||||
<label index="_extendToSubpages.image">EXT:context_help/cshimages/pages_2.png</label>
|
||||
<label index="extendToSubpages.image_descr">L'accesso alla pagina non è consentito a determinati gruppi e è impostato anche 'Estendi alle sottopagine'. Questo risulta anche dall'icona di pagina che è cambiata.</label>
|
||||
<label index="alias.description">Un URL Alias è un identificatore univoco per la pagina. Puoi usare questa stringa invece dell'ID per far riferimento alla pagina.</label>
|
||||
<label index="alias.details">Una pagina è identificata dal suo ID. Per esempio puoi accedere ad una pagina in TYPO3 con '../?id=123'. Se la pagina con ID '123' ha come URL Alias 'uno_due_tre' allora l'URL '.../?id=uno_due_tre' visualizzerà esattamente la stessa pagina, perchè 'uno_due_tre' è un URL Alias per l'ID '123'.
|
||||
Gli URL Alias sono normalmente assegnati alle pagine più frequentate piuttosto che a tutte le pagine. Nella maggior parte delle configurazioni TYPO3 potrete usare la sintassi '.. &lt;link uno_due_tre&gt;vai alla pagina&lt;/link&gt; ..' per creare un link alla pagina. Questo è più facile da ricordare.
|
||||
Un altro uso è se devi cambiare il link della pagina a cui solitamente punta. In questo caso puoi cancellare l'URL Alias della pagina originale e riaggiungerlo alla nuova pagina. Tutti i link che stanno usando l'URL Alias da adesso faranno riferimento alla nuova pagina e al suo ID.</label>
|
||||
<label index="alias.syntax">Un URL Alias può contenere caratteri minuscoli alfanumerici e deve essere unico.
|
||||
Notare: Se l'URL Alias esiste già nel sito, avrà un numero aggiunto alla fine di esso.</label>
|
||||
<label index="target.description">Questo imposta il Link Target di default per le voci di menu che hanno un link a questa pagina. Può anche essere usato per aprire la pagina come una finestra popup.</label>
|
||||
<label index="target.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="no_cache.description">Questa opzione disabilita il caching lato server della pagina.</label>
|
||||
<label index="no_cache.details">Di norma le pagine in TYPO3 vengono scritte nella memoria del server (Cache) dopo essere state composte per la prima volta. Questo significa che una pagina quando viene pubblicata per la seconda volta e successive, sarà molto più veloce da scaricare da parte del visitatore.
|
||||
Per la maggior parte delle pagine non ci sono problemi con la memoria Cache; le prestazioni migliorano sensibilmente.
|
||||
Comunque in alcuni casi puoi disabilitare la memorizzazione nella Cache, ad esempio quando deve essere visualizzato del contenuto dinamico. Normalmente il codice PHP per ll rendering è programmato per disabilitare il caching automaticamente. Ma con questa opzione puoi forzare la pagina a non essere conservata in cache.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_no_cache.seeAlso">pages:cache_timeout</label>
|
||||
<label index="cache_timeout.description">Definisce la durata della pagina da conservare in Cache.</label>
|
||||
<label index="cache_timeout.details">Per default le pagine durano in cache per 24 ore. Dopo 24 ore la pagina viene rigenerata e scritta nuovamente in cache. Dipende dalla configurazione del tuo sito; la cache può essere cancellata a mezzanotte.
|
||||
Puoi usare questa opzione per pagine specifiche che necessitano di una permanenza in cache superiore al tempo di <i>default</i>.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_cache_timeout.seeAlso">pages:no_cache</label>
|
||||
<label index="no_search.description">Se abilitata, questa opzione esclude la pagina dalle operazioni di indicizzazione per la ricerca nel sito web.</label>
|
||||
<label index="author.description">Inserisci il nome dell'autore della pagina</label>
|
||||
<label index="author.details">Se viene usato il nome dell'autore o non dipende da opzioni di configurazione passate dal template di Typoscript.
|
||||
|
||||
- puoi usarlo nei meta-tage.
|
||||
- se stai utilizzando pagine di TYPO3 come 'articoli' allora puoi usare questo campo per visualizzare il nome dell'autore della pagina-articolo.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_author.seeAlso">pages:author_email</label>
|
||||
<label index="author_email.description">Inserisci l'indirizzo e-mail dell'autore della pagina.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_author_email.seeAlso">pages:author</label>
|
||||
<label index="module.description">Definisce la pagina come contenitore per un plugin di Frontend.</label>
|
||||
<label index="module.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="media.description">File media in allegato relazionali alla pagina.</label>
|
||||
<label index="media.details">Questo campo permette di allegare diversi file alla pagina; tuttavia il loro utilizzo dipende dal template Typoscript
|
||||
Per esempio il template potrebbe utilizzare questo campo come logo per la pagina oppure utilizzare il primo file di tipo immagine come link nel menu di navigazione. In ogni caso, l'utilizzo di queste informazioni dipende esclusivamente dal template.</label>
|
||||
<label index="subtitle.description">Inserisci un sottotitolo, se necessario.</label>
|
||||
<label index="subtitle.details">L'utilizzo di questo campo dipende o meno dal template in uso. In molti casi non viene usato.</label>
|
||||
<label index="url.description">Inserisci l'URL della pagina alla quale effettuare la redirezione.</label>
|
||||
<label index="url.details">Per esempio 'http://www.typo3.org' o il solo 'www.typo3.org' se il selettore 'Protocollo' e' configurato come 'http://'.
|
||||
Utilizzare il selettore 'Protocollo' per indicare il prefisso dell'URL.
|
||||
|
||||
Questa opzione viene usata solo se il tipo di pagina scelto è 'Collegamento a Url esterno'.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_url.seeAlso">pages:urltype</label>
|
||||
<label index="shortcut.description">Selezionare una pagina che agirà come destinazione per la scorciatoia (Shortcut). Quando la pagina corrente sarà richiesta nel frontent, typo3 effettuerà una redirezione alla pagina di destinazione (shortcut target).</label>
|
||||
<label index="shortcut.details">Clicca l'icona 'Naviga nei records' e una nuova finestra sarà visualizzata, con la quale potrai scegliere in modo semplice la pagina di destinazione della scorciatoia (Shortcut Target).
|
||||
|
||||
Questa opzione è disponibile solo se il tipo di pagina è 'scorciatoia' (Shortcut).</label>
|
||||
<label index="_shortcut.seeAlso">pages:doktype,
|
||||
pages:shortcut_mode</label>
|
||||
<label index="_shortcut.image">EXT:context_help/cshimages/page_shortcut.gif</label>
|
||||
<label index="shortcut.image_descr">Selezionare la pagina di destinazione (Shortcut Target) attravero il navigatore (element browser).</label>
|
||||
<label index="keywords.description">Inserisci le parole-chiave (keywords) per la pagina separate da virgole. E' possibile utilizzare anche frasi brevi.</label>
|
||||
<label index="keywords.details">Diversi siti con TYPO3 usano queste parole chiave nei meta-tag di pagina, ma tu puoi disporre anche di una diversa configurazione nel template di Typoscript.
|
||||
|
||||
Per ottimizzare la pagina ai fini dei motori di ricerca come Google non dovresti usare più di 3-6 parolel chiave. Dovresti anche accertarti che le parole chiave siano pubblicate nella pagina corrente.
|
||||
|
||||
Nota che alcune estensioni per implementare un motore di ricerca interno al sito, come ad esempio l'estensione 'Indexed Search' possono essere configurate per l'uso di queste parole chiave.
|
||||
|
||||
Le parole chiave possono anche essere usate per creare un meno di pagine relazionate. Per farlo basta creare un tipo di contenuto come 'mappa del sito' (Sitemap) e scegliere dal menu a tendina il tipo <i>Pagine relazionate (basate sulle parole chiave)</i>.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_keywords.seeAlso">pages:description</label>
|
||||
<label index="description.description">Inserire una breve descrizione della pagina. Sarò visualizzata tra i risultati della ricerca elencate in vari motori.</label>
|
||||
<label index="description.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_description.seeAlso">pages:keywords
|
||||
pages:abstract</label>
|
||||
<label index="abstract.description">Inserire un abstract dei contenuti. Potrà essere visualizzato in una anteprima degli articoli.</label>
|
||||
<label index="abstract.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_abstract.seeAlso">pages:description</label>
|
||||
<label index="newUntil.description">Inserisci la data a partire dalla quale la pagina non sarà più considerata come 'nuova'.</label>
|
||||
<label index="newUntil.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="newUntil.syntax">Vedi la Pagina / Data di Pubblicazione (clicca sotto)</label>
|
||||
<label index="_newUntil.seeAlso">pages:starttime</label>
|
||||
<label index="lastUpdated.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="lastUpdated.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="lastUpdated.syntax"/>
|
||||
<label index="nav_hide.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="_nav_hide.seeAlso">pages:nav_title</label>
|
||||
<label index="nav_title.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="content_from_pid.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="urltype.description">Configura il protocollo per l'URL</label>
|
||||
<label index="shortcut_mode.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="mount_pid.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="mount_pid.details">Nel frontend questo viene fatto aggiungendo una nuova variabile, &MP, all'URL. Questo stabilisce un collegamento tra il ramo montato (mounted branch) e quello principale tramite due id di pagina.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_mount_pid.seeAlso">pages:mount_pid_ol</label>
|
||||
<label index="mount_pid_ol.description">Mostra il contenuto della pagina corrente o lo sostituiscilo completamente con quello della pagina montata (Mounted Page).</label>
|
||||
<label index="_mount_pid_ol.seeAlso">pages:mount_pid</label>
|
||||
<label index="title.description.+">Questo è normalmente visualizzato nella navigazione del sito web.</label>
|
||||
<label index="TSconfig.details.+"/>
|
||||
<label index="l18n_cfg.description">Influenza la disponibilità delle pagine nelle varie lingue</label>
|
||||
<label index="l18n_cfg.details"/>
|
||||
</languageKey>
|
||||
</data>
|
||||
</T3locallangExt>
|
||||
@@ -0,0 +1,807 @@
|
||||
<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
|
||||
<xliff xmlns:t3="http://typo3.org/schemas/xliff" version="1.0">
|
||||
<file t3:id="1415814794" source-language="en" datatype="plaintext" original="messages" date="2011-10-17T20:22:32Z" product-name="context_help" target-language="it">
|
||||
<header/>
|
||||
<body>
|
||||
<trans-unit id=".description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>All visible content on webpages is typically made by "Page Content" records, often referred to as "Content Elements". Content Elements are managed by the "Page" Module which organizes Content Elements in multiple columns and languages.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Tutti i contenuti visibili nelle pagine web sono solitamente creati tramite i record "Page Content", che spesso viene definiti come "Elemento di Contenuto". Gli elementi di contenuto sono gestiti tramite il modulo "Page" che li organizza in colonne multiple e lingua.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id=".details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>"Page Content" records are sortable and can be rearranged. The "Language" and "Column" selectors of the "Page Content" records determines when and where they appear. If you do not change the value of the "Language" and "Column" selectors the Content Element will appear in the default configuration.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Page Content Principles | http://typo3.org/documentation/document-library/doc_tut_quickstart/Page_content/,
|
||||
_MOD_web_layout</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Principi di Page Content | http://typo3.org/documentation/document-library/doc_tut_quickstart/Page_content/,
|
||||
_MOD_web_layout</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_.image" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>EXT:context_help/cshimages/ttcontent_1.png,
|
||||
EXT:context_help/cshimages/ttcontent_2.png,
|
||||
EXT:context_help/cshimages/ttcontent_3.png</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">EXT:context_help/cshimages/ttcontent_1.png,
|
||||
EXT:context_help/cshimages/ttcontent_2.png,
|
||||
EXT:context_help/cshimages/ttcontent_3.png</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id=".image_descr" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>The Page Module is used to manage Content Elements arranged in columns and languages.
|
||||
A Content Element has an editing form with many options. The "Type" determines which options are visible.
|
||||
In the Frontend, a Content Element like the above could look like this.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Il modulo Pagina è usato per gestire gli elementi di contenuto disposti in colonne e lingue.
|
||||
Un elemento di contenuto ha un modulo per la modifica con varie opzioni. Il "Tipo" definisce quali opzioni saranno visibili.
|
||||
Nel fronted un elemento di contenuto puo' apparire simile a quello sopra.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="CType.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Select the kind of Page Content this element represents. New options will appear when you save the record.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Selezionare il tipo di Page Content che l'elemento rappresenta. Nuove opzioni appariranno qando il record viene salvato.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="CType.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>The 'Type' of content you select determines which options are available in the editing form so be sure to save the record before making other changes.
|
||||
|
||||
This is a description of the various types:
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Header</strong>
|
||||
This type allows you to insert a standard Content Element header and nothing more.
|
||||
Almost all the other types described below also include the Header and its options. The Header type provides a way to insert a header without any other content.
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Text</strong>
|
||||
The Text type allows you to insert regular page content. It is generally used for text only content.
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Text & Images</strong>
|
||||
This is the same as the Text type (regular page content) but with the option of attaching images.
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Image</strong>
|
||||
The Image type allows you to insert image only page content.
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Bullet List</strong>
|
||||
Lets you create a bullet list. Each line in the text field will appear as a single bullet.
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Table</strong>
|
||||
Lets you create <em>simple</em> tables. Each line represents a row in the table and vertical bars ('|') separate each column. A popup wizard is also available.
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>File Links</strong>
|
||||
Allows you to present a list of files for download. Thumbnails can be attached to the list and you can also display the file size.
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Form</strong>
|
||||
Lets you create mail forms using a special syntax or a popup wizard.
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Search</strong>
|
||||
This inserts a search box and also shows the search results when a search is performed on the page.
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Login</strong>
|
||||
Displays a login box for website users. This is only useful if you have already created website users and usergroups.
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Menu/Sitemap</strong>
|
||||
Offers a selection of menus and a sitemap you can insert on a page.
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Insert records</strong>
|
||||
This acts as placeholder for other records. With this Content Element, you can resuse multiple content elements from other pages.
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Insert plugin</strong>
|
||||
This will allows you to insert news, forums, guestbooks, lists of addresses, and other functionality. Plugins are typically provided by TYPO3 extensions. The available fields and required configuration depend on the extension.
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Divider</strong>
|
||||
This inserts a simple horizontal rule on a page.
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>HTML</strong>
|
||||
This is plain HTML content. Anything added in the HTML Code of this Content Element will be displayed directly on the page without any preprocessing.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_CType.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:colPos,
|
||||
tt_content:sys_language_uid,
|
||||
About Content Elements | http://typo3.org/documentation/document-library/doc_tut_quickstart/Content_element_type/</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">tt_content:colPos,
|
||||
tt_content:sys_language_uid,
|
||||
About Content Elements | http://typo3.org/documentation/document-library/doc_tut_quickstart/Content_element_type/</target><note from="developer">A part of this string is an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy this part into the translation field and do not change it. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>A part of this string is an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy this part into the translation field and do not change it. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_CType.image" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>EXT:context_help/cshimages/ttcontent_4.png</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">EXT:context_help/cshimages/ttcontent_4.png</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
come immagine potrebbe essere mantenuta</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="hidden.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Check this box if you wish to disable the Content Element and keep it from being displayed on the website.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Seleziona questa casella se desideri disabilitate l'elemento di contenuto ed escluderlo dalla visualizzazione nel sito web.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_hidden.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:starttime,
|
||||
tt_content:endtime,
|
||||
tt_content:fe_group,
|
||||
tt_content:colPos,
|
||||
tt_content:sys_language_uid</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">tt_content:starttime,
|
||||
tt_content:endtime,
|
||||
tt_content:fe_group,
|
||||
tt_content:colPos,
|
||||
tt_content:sys_language_uid</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="starttime.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter the date when the Content Element should be published and displayed on the website.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Inserire la data a partire dalla quale il contenuto sarà pubblicato e quindi visibile nel sito web.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_starttime.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>pages:starttime,
|
||||
tt_content:endtime,
|
||||
tt_content:hidden,
|
||||
tt_content:fe_group</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">pages:starttime,
|
||||
tt_content:endtime,
|
||||
tt_content:hidden,
|
||||
tt_content:fe_group</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="endtime.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter the date when the Content Element should expire and disappear from the website.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Inserire la data a partire dalla quale il contenuto scadrà e quindi sparirà dal sito web, non essendo più visibile.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_endtime.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>pages:endtime,
|
||||
tt_content:starttime,
|
||||
tt_content:hidden,
|
||||
tt_content:fe_group</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">pages:endtime,
|
||||
tt_content:starttime,
|
||||
tt_content:hidden,
|
||||
tt_content:fe_group</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="fe_group.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>If Usergroup Access Rights are set to a usergroup name, only website users who are logged in and members of the selected usergroup will be able to view the Content Element. The special option 'Hide at Login' means the Content Element will <em>not</em> be visible for any website users that are logged in. Likewise "Show at Any Login" will make the Content Element visible for any logged in website user.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="fe_group.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>The 'Hide at Login' option is is useful if you want to present information like "How to Login" that becomes irrelevant when a website user is actually logged in.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_fe_group.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:hidden,
|
||||
tt_content:starttime,
|
||||
tt_content:endtime,
|
||||
pages:fe_group,
|
||||
fe_users,
|
||||
fe_groups</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">tt_content:hidden,
|
||||
tt_content:starttime,
|
||||
tt_content:endtime,
|
||||
pages:fe_group,
|
||||
fe_users,
|
||||
fe_groups</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="sys_language_uid.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Select the system language of this Content Element. <strong>Notice:</strong> This will affect the Content Element visibility by limiting it to a certain language.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="sys_language_uid.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>This allows you to assign a specific language to the Content Element. If you select anything but the default value, the element will <em>not</em> be visible unless the language assigned is also configured by the TypoScript template.
|
||||
The available system languages are created by the administrator.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_sys_language_uid.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:colPos,
|
||||
sys_language,
|
||||
Localization concepts [Technical] | http://typo3.org/documentation/tips-tricks/multi-language-sites-in-typo3/,
|
||||
_MOD_web_layout:language_list</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">tt_content:colPos,
|
||||
sys_language,
|
||||
Localization concepts [Technical] | http://typo3.org/documentation/tips-tricks/multi-language-sites-in-typo3/,
|
||||
_MOD_web_layout:language_list</target><note from="developer">A part of this string is an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy this part into the translation field and do not change it. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>A part of this string is an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy this part into the translation field and do not change it. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="layout.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Select a Layout.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Seleziona un Layout.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="layout.details" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>This option does not work by default for all Content Elements but your website may display Content Elements differently depending on the layout.
|
||||
|
||||
The File Links Content Element does make use of the Layout field by default:
|
||||
"Normal" will provide a list of file links with no thumbnail.
|
||||
"Layout 1" adds a file icon to the left of the link
|
||||
"Layout 2" adds a thumbnail for image files and an icon for other files. A black border is wrapped around the icon.
|
||||
"Layout 3" is similar to Layout 2, but without the black border.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Questa opzione non viene supportata come impostazione predefinita per tutti i Content Elements, in questo caso i Content Elements saranno visualizzati utilizzando il layout base del tuo sito web.
|
||||
|
||||
I File Links ai Content Elements non utilizzeranno il campo Layout di defautl:
|
||||
"Normal" la lista dei file sarà mostrata come collegamenti senza anteprime o icone.
|
||||
"Layout 1" un'icona sarà aggiunta alla sinistra del collegamento
|
||||
"Layout 2" un'anteprima sarà mostrata per i file di tipo immagine e un'icona per i file di altro tipo. Le icone e le anteprime saranno circondate da un bordo nero.
|
||||
"Layout 3" come il Layout 2, ma senza bordo nero.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="colPos.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Select the column position of this element. <strong>Notice:</strong> This may affect whether the Content Element is visible depending on your website template.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="colPos.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Many websites only use one column of content. Some templates, however, let you put content in multiple columns using the Column option.
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Notice:</strong> Selecting a column other than "Normal" may cause the Content Element to disappear if the website template does not use that column. If your Content Element mysteriously disappears make sure the Column and Language selectors are set correctly.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_colPos.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:sys_language_uid,
|
||||
_MOD_web_layout:columns_multi,
|
||||
_MOD_web_layout:columns_single</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">tt_content:sys_language_uid,
|
||||
_MOD_web_layout:columns_multi,
|
||||
_MOD_web_layout:columns_single</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="date.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Enter a date to be displayed above the header.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="header.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter header text for the Content Element.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Inserisci il testo per l'intestazione dell'elemento di contenuto.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="header.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Almost all Content Elements will display this header above the content. If you don't want the header displayed, set the header Layout to "Hidden". You can also choose not to enter any content in this field.
|
||||
|
||||
Some content element types do not display the header by default. In those cases the Header field is typically labeled "Name" instead. One example is the HTML Content Element.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_header.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:header_position,
|
||||
tt_content:header_link,
|
||||
tt_content:header_layout,
|
||||
tt_content:date,</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">tt_content:header_position,
|
||||
tt_content:header_link,
|
||||
tt_content:header_layout,
|
||||
tt_content:date,</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_header.image" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>EXT:context_help/cshimages/ttcontent_6.png</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">EXT:context_help/cshimages/ttcontent_6.png</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="header_position.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Aligns the header to the left, center, or right.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Allineamento dell'intestazione (sinistra, centrata, destra)</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_header_position.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:header</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">tt_content:header</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="header_link.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Creates a link from the header to a Page ID, email address, or URL.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="header_link.syntax" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>If you insert a Page ID (ex. 51), the link will point to the page with id=51 <em>inside</em> TYPO3.
|
||||
If you insert an email address (ex. name@my-domain.test), the link will point to that email address.
|
||||
If you insert an URL or domain, (ex. www.typo3.org or http://www.my-domain.org), the link will point to that website.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_header_link.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:header</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">tt_content:header</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="header_layout.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Select a visual design for the header.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Seleziona il design visuale per l'intestazione (header).</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="header_layout.details" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>If you select "Default" the standard design (which is one of the layouts 1-5) will be used.
|
||||
Alternatively you can select from Layout 1 through 5 which are configured in the website template with individual visual designs.
|
||||
If you select "Hidden" the header will simply not appear. This is useful when you don't need a header to display on the website but still want to identify the Content Element in the Backend.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Se selezioni "Predefinito" (Default) sarà usato il design standard (che è uno dei layout da 1 a 5).
|
||||
In alternativa puoi fare una scelta da Layout1 a Layout5; questi elementi sono configurati nel template per il sito web come design visuali individuali.
|
||||
Se selezioni "Nascondi" (Hidden) l'intestazione (header) non sarà visualizzata. Questo è utile quando non hai bisogno di visualizzare una intestazione nel sito ma vuoi identificare il contenuto nel Backend.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_header_layout.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:header</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">tt_content:header</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="subheader.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter a subheader to be displayed below the main header. If the Content Element is a "Form" this field is instead used as the Recipient Email.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Inserire una sottotitolo che sarà visualizzato sotto l'intestazione principale. Se il contenuto è di tipo "Form" questo campo sarà utilizzato come Email per l'indirizzo di destinazione.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="subheader.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>A subheader is displayed only with "Header" Content Elements and with "Form" Content Elements (as the Recipient Email).</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_subheader.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:header
|
||||
tt_content:bodytext</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">tt_content:header
|
||||
tt_content:bodytext</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="bodytext.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter the main text.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Inserisci il testo principale.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="bodytext.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>The main text of the Content Element is entered here and can be formatted with HTML or a Rich Text Editor.
|
||||
The field is reused in other Content Element types so changing the type will cause any text to be reused in that new Content Element type.
|
||||
|
||||
When you're using this field with the "Text" and "Text & Images" types, the content is normal body text. Each linebreak signifies a new paragraph, you can use the special TYPO3 tag, &lt;LINK&gt;, for making links. You can use many HTML tags but there are limitations depending on your website configuration.
|
||||
A Rich Text Editor is commonly used to add a visual editing interface for 'Text' and 'Text & Images' Content Elements.
|
||||
|
||||
<b>Bullet Lists:</b>
|
||||
If the type is "Bullet List" each line in this field is a bullet item.
|
||||
|
||||
<b>Tables:</b>
|
||||
If the type is "Table" each line represents a table row. Within each line, columns are divided by a vertical bar ('|'). A table row with 3 columns could look like "This is column 1 | Column 2 here | Third column!". The table wizard can also be used for creating tables and is much easier than hand coding them.
|
||||
|
||||
<b>Parameters:</b>
|
||||
Types like "Form" and "Multimedia" use this field for parameters than can be passed to the Content Element. The "HTML" type expects raw HTML which is simply displayed on the website without any processing.
|
||||
|
||||
<b>Making a mail form:</b>
|
||||
When you have selected the "Form" Content Element you can enter form field and other options. This is a brief example:
|
||||
|
||||
Your name: | *name=input,40 | [Enter name!]
|
||||
Your email: | *email=input,40
|
||||
Your address: | address=textarea,40,10
|
||||
Your haircolor: |hair=radio|Blue=blue, Red=red
|
||||
|
||||
|formtype_mail = submit | Send Form
|
||||
|subject=hidden| Enter a subject here!
|
||||
|html_enabled=hidden | 1
|
||||
|
||||
The first two lines makes input fields for name and email. Both are marked as "required" and are designated by the *, and the name field has a default value of "[Enter name!]".
|
||||
The third line is a text box and the fourth makes radio buttons to select a hair color.
|
||||
After the input fields, there are three important lines in the end. The first makes a submit button with the label "Send Form", the second line is the subject of the email the receiver gets, and the third line formats the email using HTML.
|
||||
Like the table wizard, it is easier to use the form wizard rather than hand coding the forms.
|
||||
|
||||
<b>Note:</b> For a form to work you must add an email address for the Recipient Email in its field.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_bodytext.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:CType,
|
||||
tt_content:subheader,
|
||||
xMOD_csh_corebe:wizard_forms_wiz,
|
||||
xMOD_csh_corebe:wizard_table_wiz</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">tt_content:CType,
|
||||
tt_content:subheader,
|
||||
xMOD_csh_corebe:wizard_forms_wiz,
|
||||
xMOD_csh_corebe:wizard_table_wiz</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="image.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Insert one or more images.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Inserire una o più immagini.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="image.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>You can attach multiple images to the Content Element.
|
||||
Depending on the configuration of TYPO3, you can attach images in many formats without worrying about size and compression. TYPO3's graphics processing handles these details for you.
|
||||
|
||||
When you use the "Text & Images" type, it's important to select a proper position for images. For this purpose, use the Position and Aligment selector. See link to "Page Content / Position" below.
|
||||
You can also display images in multiple columns and even enable an option that opens full size images when thumbnails are clicked.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_image.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:imagewidth,
|
||||
tt_content:imageheight,
|
||||
tt_content:imageorient,
|
||||
tt_content:imageborder,
|
||||
tt_content:image_noRows,
|
||||
tt_content:image_link,
|
||||
tt_content:image_zoom,
|
||||
tt_content:imagecols,
|
||||
tt_content:imagecaption,
|
||||
tt_content:image_effects,
|
||||
tt_content:image_frames,
|
||||
tt_content:image_compression,
|
||||
Using images ("Getting Started") | http://typo3.org/documentation/document-library/doc_tut_quickstart/Managing_files_in_TY/
|
||||
Using images (Animation) | FILE:EXT:welcome/modsub/ani_10.gif</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">tt_content:imagewidth,
|
||||
tt_content:imageheight,
|
||||
tt_content:imageorient,
|
||||
tt_content:imageborder,
|
||||
tt_content:image_noRows,
|
||||
tt_content:image_link,
|
||||
tt_content:image_zoom,
|
||||
tt_content:imagecols,
|
||||
tt_content:imagecaption,
|
||||
tt_content:image_effects,
|
||||
tt_content:image_frames,
|
||||
tt_content:image_compression,
|
||||
Using images ("Getting Started") | http://typo3.org/documentation/document-library/doc_tut_quickstart/Managing_files_in_TY/
|
||||
Using images (Animation) | FILE:EXT:welcome/modsub/ani_10.gif</target><note from="developer">A part of this string is an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy this part into the translation field and do not change it. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>A part of this string is an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy this part into the translation field and do not change it. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_image.image" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>EXT:context_help/cshimages/ttcontent_5.png</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">EXT:context_help/cshimages/ttcontent_5.png</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="image.image_descr" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>This shows all the options related to inserting images in Content Elements. Depending on user permissions, you may not be able to use all of them.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="imagewidth.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter the width (in pixels) for displaying the image in the Frontend of your website.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Inserire la larghezza (in pixel) per visualizzare l'immagine nel Frontend del sito web.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="imagewidth.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>The TypoScript template is normally configured with maximum image width so you shouldn't need to specify a width. In unique cases, this provides additional flexibility though.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_imagewidth.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:imageheight,
|
||||
tt_content:image</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">tt_content:imageheight,
|
||||
tt_content:image</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="imageheight.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter the height (in pixels) for displaying the images in the Frontend of your website.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Inserire l'altezza (in pixel) per visualizzare le immagini in Frontend del sito web.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_imageheight.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:imagewidth,
|
||||
tt_content:image</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">tt_content:imagewidth,
|
||||
tt_content:image</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="imageorient.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Select the position and alignment of the images relative to the body text.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="imageorient.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>The positions above and below the body text are pretty straight forward.
|
||||
The options for "In text" mean that images are displayed with text wrapped around them. When you select this option the template will probably force the images into smaller dimensions to accomodate the width of the template and the width of the text. The bodytext will float <em>under</em> the image block when it reaches the end of the image block. In other words, the body text <em>wraps around</em> the image block. If you select "In text" below the "No wrap" divider, the body text will not float under the image block, but simply continue in its column.
|
||||
Apart from the visual difference there is a technical aspect as well. If you choose to allow the content to wrap the image block you will experience a strange phenomenon when you do not have enough bodytext to make it float around the image: subsequent content elements on the page will appear to be layered on top of the image block. However it's easily solved by changing the "In text" position to the equal value but below the "No wrap" divider.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="imageborder.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Displays a colored border around the images.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Visualizza un bordo colorato intorno all'immagine.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_imageborder.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="no">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:imagecols,
|
||||
tt_content:image</source>
|
||||
<target state="needs-translation">tt_content:imagewidth,
|
||||
tt_content:image</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
87%</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="image_noRows.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Disables tablerows in the image block.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="image_noRows.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>To illustrate, imagine you have 2 or more columns <em>and</em> rows of images. If one image in the upper row is taller than the second this will generate empty space beneath the second image. This is due to the normal flow in which the images are placed in table cells.
|
||||
If you enable the No Rows option, the table will place the images in a column into a single table cell which make the distance between them vertically identical throughout. This may provide a better look if the alternative is unacceptable.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_image_noRows.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="no">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:imagecols,
|
||||
tt_content:image</source>
|
||||
<target state="needs-translation">tt_content:imagewidth,
|
||||
tt_content:image</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
87%</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="image_link.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter a link for the image. For multiple images, separate the links with commas.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Inserire un link per l'immagine. Per immagini multiple, bisogna separare i link con le virgole.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="image_link.details" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>By default all images share the same link. Your TypoScript template may be configured to allow a separate link for each image. If this is the case, you simply separate the links with a comma.
|
||||
|
||||
See Page Content>Link below for details on syntax.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Di base tutte le immagini condividono lo stesso link. Il TypoScript template dovrebbe essere configurato per consentire un link separato per ogni immagine. Se questo è il caso, si devono semplicemente separare i link con una virgola.
|
||||
|
||||
Per avere dettagli sulla sintassi guardare in basso Contenuto di Pagina > Link.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_image_link.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:header_link,
|
||||
tt_content:image_zoom,
|
||||
tt_content:image</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">tt_content:header_link,
|
||||
tt_content:image_zoom,
|
||||
tt_content:image</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="image_zoom.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>When enabled, clicking an image will open a larger version in a popup window.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Quando è abilitato, cliccando su una immagine si aprirà una finestra di popup con l'immagine in formato grande.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="image_zoom.details" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>This option overrides the value in the Links field.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Questa opzione sovrascrive il valore del campo Link.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_image_zoom.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="no">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:image_link,
|
||||
tt_content:image</source>
|
||||
<target state="needs-translation">tt_content:imageheight,
|
||||
tt_content:image</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
87%</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="image_effects.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Select special image processing effects, such as rotation and color adjustments.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_image_effects.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:image_compression,
|
||||
tt_content:image_frames,
|
||||
tt_content:image</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">tt_content:image_compression,
|
||||
tt_content:image_frames,
|
||||
tt_content:image</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="image_frames.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Select special image framing options.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_image_frames.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:image_compression,
|
||||
tt_content:image_effects,
|
||||
tt_content:image</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">tt_content:image_compression,
|
||||
tt_content:image_effects,
|
||||
tt_content:image</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="image_compression.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Select image quality and image type options.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Seleziona la qualità e il tipo di immagine.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_image_compression.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:image_frames,
|
||||
tt_content:image_effects,
|
||||
tt_content:image</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">tt_content:image_frames,
|
||||
tt_content:image_effects,
|
||||
tt_content:image</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="imagecols.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Set the number of columns when the images are displayed in the Frontend of the website.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Impostare il numero di colonne quando le immagini vengono visualizzate nel Frontend del sito web.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_imagecols.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="no">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:image_noRows,
|
||||
tt_content:image</source>
|
||||
<target state="needs-translation">tt_content:imagewidth,
|
||||
tt_content:image</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
82%</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="imagecaption.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter captions for the images. For multiple images, enter one caption per line.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">inserire la didascalia per le immagini. Per immagini multiple, inserire una didascialia per linea</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="imagecaption.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>By default, the caption is positioned below the images. However, your TypoScript template may be configured to allow individual image captions by setting "styles.content.imgtext.captionSplit=1" in your template constants.
|
||||
In this case, each line in this field will be the image caption of the corresponding image in the list.
|
||||
|
||||
The caption text field is also used by the Content Element type "File Links" where each line represents a description of a file in the list.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_imagecaption.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="no">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:imagecaption_position,
|
||||
tt_content:image</source>
|
||||
<target state="needs-translation">tt_content:imagewidth,
|
||||
tt_content:image</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
85%
|
||||
82%
|
||||
100%
|
||||
100%</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="imagecaption_position.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="no">
|
||||
<source>Aligns the image captions to the left, center, or right.</source>
|
||||
<target state="needs-translation">Allineamento dell'intestazione (sinistra, centrata, destra)</target><note>78%</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_imagecaption_position.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="no">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:imagecaption,
|
||||
tt_content:image</source>
|
||||
<target state="needs-translation">tt_content:imagewidth,
|
||||
tt_content:image</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
85%</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="cols.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Select a fixed number of table columns</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="pages.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Select a target page or multiple target pages.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="pages.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>This field is used by many of the Content Element types to create a relation to either a single target page or multiple target pages. If no target page is specified, the current page will generally be used.
|
||||
|
||||
Using the "Search" Content Element, the target page is where search results will appear. You must make sure that this page has a similar "Search" Content Element to display the results.
|
||||
|
||||
The "Login" Content Element (not to be confused with the Login plugin available when the felogin extension is installed) also uses this field to redirect the login to a certain page. That page does not need to contain a "Login" Content Element in order to perform the authentication since any TYPO3 page can handle a login request.
|
||||
If you specify a second page in this list, the ID will be passed to the login system as the page inside TYPO3 where website users are found. You should use this only if your template is not already configured to pass this value on.
|
||||
In order for the login procedure to work you must make sure that you have created website users and website usergroups, have specified where these website users can be found (typically a SysFolder), a page ID in the page list, and ensured that cookies are enabled for the site.
|
||||
|
||||
The "Menu/Sitemap" Content Elements also use this field. In this case the page will determine the starting point for the menu or the actual pages shown in the menu. This behavior depends on the menu type you have selected.
|
||||
|
||||
Finally the "Form" element uses this field as the target page to which the form is submitted. A common use is the "Thank you" page after the form is completed.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_pages.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:CType,
|
||||
tt_content:recursive</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">tt_content:CType,
|
||||
tt_content:recursive</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="recursive.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>The number of subpage levels that should also be included for each page in the list.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="recursive.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>This feature depends on the TypoScript template configuration and Content Element type. If enabled, each page listed in the "Pages" field will also have its subpages included to the specified depth.
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Warning:</strong> If there are many subpages, be aware that this option may return a large number of results</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_recursive.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="no">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:pages</source>
|
||||
<target state="needs-translation">tt_content:header</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
76%</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="menu_type.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Select the type of menu you wish to create.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="menu_type.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>This is a short description of each type:
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Menu of selected pages</strong>
|
||||
This will create a menu with links to the pages in the Selected Pages list.
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Menu of subpages of selected pages</strong>
|
||||
This will create in a menu with links to the subpages of the pages in the Selected Pages list. If you do not specify any pages, the subpages to the current page will be used.
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Menu of subpages of selected pages (with abstract)</strong>
|
||||
Like the previous option, but also displays the content of the Abstract field (or the Description field) for each page in the menu. The Abstract field is given priority over the Description field if both are complete.
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Menu of subpages of selected pages + sections</strong>
|
||||
Like the previous option, but includes links to all Content Elements on the page that are marked to Show In Section Menus.
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Sitemap</strong>
|
||||
Generates a classic tree sitemap. Notice that the sitemap will begin from the current page unless you select another page instead.
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Section index (page content marked for section menus)</strong>
|
||||
This makes a menu of Content Elements on the selected pages for all Content Elements marked to Show In Section Menu. This is a great way to make an index at the top of the page.
|
||||
If you don't want certain Content Elements to appear in the list, just uncheck the Show in Section Menus checkbox for those elements.
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Recently updated pages</strong>
|
||||
This displays the 10 most recently updated pages.
|
||||
<strong>Notice:</strong> If you update a page and the updated page is not included in this list, clearing the Page Cache will resolve the issue.
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Related pages (based on keywords)</strong>
|
||||
Displays other related pages based on the keywords of the selected pages matched against the keywords of other pages.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_menu_type.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:pages,
|
||||
tt_content:sectionIndex</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">tt_content:pages,
|
||||
tt_content:sectionIndex</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="list_type.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Select a plugin to insert.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Seleziona un plugin da inserire.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="list_type.details" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>The list of plugins you can insert on a page. The available plugins depend on which extensions are installed.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">La lista dei plugins che puoi inserire in una pagina. I plugin disponibili dipendono dalle estensioni installate.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_list_type.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>_MOD_tools_em</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">_MOD_tools_em</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_list_type.image" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>EXT:context_help/cshimages/ttcontent_7.png</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">EXT:context_help/cshimages/ttcontent_7.png</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
come immagine potrebbe essere mantenuta
|
||||
97%</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="select_key.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Enter a special string to define the Content Element's operation or leave it blank for the default mode. Possible values depend on the Content Element being used.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="select_key.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Whether or not the content of this field is used and how it's intepreted depends on the Content Element and/or plugin being used. It is considered obsolete for plugins today, but is used in some Content Elements such as File Links.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_select_key.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:list_type</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">tt_content:list_type</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="table_bgColor.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Select the table background color.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Seleziona il colore di sfondo della tabella.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="table_border.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Select the table border thickness.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Seleziona lo spessore del bordo della tabella.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="table_cellspacing.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Select the table cell spacing.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Selezionare la spaziatura delle celle della tabella. </target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="table_cellspacing.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Cell spacing is the distance between table cells in rows and columns. The distance is equally applied in all directions, top, bottom, left, and right.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="table_cellpadding.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="no">
|
||||
<source>Select the table cellpadding.</source>
|
||||
<target state="needs-translation">Selezionare la spaziatura delle celle della tabella. </target><note>86%
|
||||
100%
|
||||
100%</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="table_cellpadding.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Cell padding is the 'internal' margin of a table cell. The distance is equally applied in all directions, top, bottom, left, and right.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="media.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Files can be added to the list here.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="multimedia.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Insert a multimedia element here (ex. Flash movie)</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="filelink_size.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Enable the display of file sizes.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="records.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Insert records to be displayed on this page.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="spaceBefore.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Top Margin (in pixels) inserts whitespace <em>before</em> this Content Element.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_spaceBefore.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:spaceAfter,
|
||||
tt_content:section_frame</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="spaceAfter.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Bottom Margin (in pixels) inserts whitespace <em>after</em> this Content Element.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_spaceAfter.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:spaceBefore,
|
||||
tt_content:section_frame</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="section_frame.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Select indention or framing options for the Content Element.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_section_frame.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:spaceAfter,
|
||||
tt_content:spaceBefore</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="sectionIndex.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>If set, the Content Element will appear in Section Menus.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="sectionIndex.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>See more details about Section Menus by clicking below.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_sectionIndex.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="no">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:menu_type</source>
|
||||
<target state="needs-translation">tt_content:list_type</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
80%
|
||||
100%
|
||||
100%</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="linkToTop.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>If checked, a small "To Top" link will be added after the Content Element, linking back to the top of the page.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="rte_enabled.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>If checked, the Rich Text Editor will be disabled for the "Text" and "Text & Image" types (<em>in this Content Element only</em>).</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_rte_enabled.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:bodytext</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="pi_flexform.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Plugin Configuration</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="pi_flexform.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Some plugins may provide configuration options, but the actual options vary based on the plugin. Behind the scenes, these are based on FlexForms and stored as XML.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_pi_flexform.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:list_type</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">tt_content:list_type</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
100%</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
</body>
|
||||
</file>
|
||||
</xliff>
|
||||
@@ -0,0 +1,205 @@
|
||||
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
|
||||
<T3locallangExt>
|
||||
<data type="array">
|
||||
<languageKey index="it" type="array">
|
||||
<label index=".description">Tutti i contenuti visibili nelle pagine web sono solitamente creati tramite i record "Page Content", che spesso viene definiti come "Elemento di Contenuto". Gli elementi di contenuto sono gestiti tramite il modulo "Page" che li organizza in colonne multiple e lingua.</label>
|
||||
<label index=".details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_.seeAlso">Principi di Page Content | http://typo3.org/documentation/document-library/doc_tut_quickstart/Page_content/,
|
||||
_MOD_web_layout</label>
|
||||
<label index="_.image">EXT:context_help/cshimages/ttcontent_1.png,
|
||||
EXT:context_help/cshimages/ttcontent_2.png,
|
||||
EXT:context_help/cshimages/ttcontent_3.png</label>
|
||||
<label index=".image_descr">Il modulo Pagina è usato per gestire gli elementi di contenuto disposti in colonne e lingue.
|
||||
Un elemento di contenuto ha un modulo per la modifica con varie opzioni. Il "Tipo" definisce quali opzioni saranno visibili.
|
||||
Nel fronted un elemento di contenuto puo' apparire simile a quello sopra.</label>
|
||||
<label index="CType.description">Selezionare il tipo di Page Content che l'elemento rappresenta. Nuove opzioni appariranno qando il record viene salvato.</label>
|
||||
<label index="CType.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_CType.seeAlso">tt_content:colPos,
|
||||
tt_content:sys_language_uid,
|
||||
About Content Elements | http://typo3.org/documentation/document-library/doc_tut_quickstart/Content_element_type/</label>
|
||||
<label index="_CType.image">EXT:context_help/cshimages/ttcontent_4.png</label>
|
||||
<label index="hidden.description">Seleziona questa casella se desideri disabilitate l'elemento di contenuto ed escluderlo dalla visualizzazione nel sito web.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_hidden.seeAlso">tt_content:starttime,
|
||||
tt_content:endtime,
|
||||
tt_content:fe_group,
|
||||
tt_content:colPos,
|
||||
tt_content:sys_language_uid</label>
|
||||
<label index="starttime.description">Inserire la data a partire dalla quale il contenuto sarà pubblicato e quindi visibile nel sito web.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_starttime.seeAlso">pages:starttime,
|
||||
tt_content:endtime,
|
||||
tt_content:hidden,
|
||||
tt_content:fe_group</label>
|
||||
<label index="endtime.description">Inserire la data a partire dalla quale il contenuto scadrà e quindi sparirà dal sito web, non essendo più visibile.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_endtime.seeAlso">pages:endtime,
|
||||
tt_content:starttime,
|
||||
tt_content:hidden,
|
||||
tt_content:fe_group</label>
|
||||
<label index="fe_group.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="fe_group.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_fe_group.seeAlso">tt_content:hidden,
|
||||
tt_content:starttime,
|
||||
tt_content:endtime,
|
||||
pages:fe_group,
|
||||
fe_users,
|
||||
fe_groups</label>
|
||||
<label index="sys_language_uid.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="sys_language_uid.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_sys_language_uid.seeAlso">tt_content:colPos,
|
||||
sys_language,
|
||||
Localization concepts [Technical] | http://typo3.org/documentation/tips-tricks/multi-language-sites-in-typo3/,
|
||||
_MOD_web_layout:language_list</label>
|
||||
<label index="layout.description">Seleziona un Layout.</label>
|
||||
<label index="layout.details">Questa opzione non viene supportata come impostazione predefinita per tutti i Content Elements, in questo caso i Content Elements saranno visualizzati utilizzando il layout base del tuo sito web.
|
||||
|
||||
I File Links ai Content Elements non utilizzeranno il campo Layout di defautl:
|
||||
"Normal" la lista dei file sarà mostrata come collegamenti senza anteprime o icone.
|
||||
"Layout 1" un'icona sarà aggiunta alla sinistra del collegamento
|
||||
"Layout 2" un'anteprima sarà mostrata per i file di tipo immagine e un'icona per i file di altro tipo. Le icone e le anteprime saranno circondate da un bordo nero.
|
||||
"Layout 3" come il Layout 2, ma senza bordo nero.</label>
|
||||
<label index="colPos.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="colPos.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_colPos.seeAlso">tt_content:sys_language_uid,
|
||||
_MOD_web_layout:columns_multi,
|
||||
_MOD_web_layout:columns_single</label>
|
||||
<label index="date.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="header.description">Inserisci il testo per l'intestazione dell'elemento di contenuto.</label>
|
||||
<label index="header.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_header.seeAlso">tt_content:header_position,
|
||||
tt_content:header_link,
|
||||
tt_content:header_layout,
|
||||
tt_content:date,</label>
|
||||
<label index="_header.image">EXT:context_help/cshimages/ttcontent_6.png</label>
|
||||
<label index="header_position.description">Allineamento dell'intestazione (sinistra, centrata, destra)</label>
|
||||
<label index="_header_position.seeAlso">tt_content:header</label>
|
||||
<label index="header_link.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="header_link.syntax"/>
|
||||
<label index="_header_link.seeAlso">tt_content:header</label>
|
||||
<label index="header_layout.description">Seleziona il design visuale per l'intestazione (header).</label>
|
||||
<label index="header_layout.details">Se selezioni "Predefinito" (Default) sarà usato il design standard (che è uno dei layout da 1 a 5).
|
||||
In alternativa puoi fare una scelta da Layout1 a Layout5; questi elementi sono configurati nel template per il sito web come design visuali individuali.
|
||||
Se selezioni "Nascondi" (Hidden) l'intestazione (header) non sarà visualizzata. Questo è utile quando non hai bisogno di visualizzare una intestazione nel sito ma vuoi identificare il contenuto nel Backend.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_header_layout.seeAlso">tt_content:header</label>
|
||||
<label index="subheader.description">Inserire una sottotitolo che sarà visualizzato sotto l'intestazione principale. Se il contenuto è di tipo "Form" questo campo sarà utilizzato come Email per l'indirizzo di destinazione.</label>
|
||||
<label index="subheader.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_subheader.seeAlso">tt_content:header
|
||||
tt_content:bodytext</label>
|
||||
<label index="bodytext.description">Inserisci il testo principale.</label>
|
||||
<label index="bodytext.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_bodytext.seeAlso">tt_content:CType,
|
||||
tt_content:subheader,
|
||||
xMOD_csh_corebe:wizard_forms_wiz,
|
||||
xMOD_csh_corebe:wizard_table_wiz</label>
|
||||
<label index="image.description">Inserire una o più immagini.</label>
|
||||
<label index="image.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_image.seeAlso">tt_content:imagewidth,
|
||||
tt_content:imageheight,
|
||||
tt_content:imageorient,
|
||||
tt_content:imageborder,
|
||||
tt_content:image_noRows,
|
||||
tt_content:image_link,
|
||||
tt_content:image_zoom,
|
||||
tt_content:imagecols,
|
||||
tt_content:imagecaption,
|
||||
tt_content:image_effects,
|
||||
tt_content:image_frames,
|
||||
tt_content:image_compression,
|
||||
Using images ("Getting Started") | http://typo3.org/documentation/document-library/doc_tut_quickstart/Managing_files_in_TY/
|
||||
Using images (Animation) | FILE:EXT:welcome/modsub/ani_10.gif</label>
|
||||
<label index="_image.image">EXT:context_help/cshimages/ttcontent_5.png</label>
|
||||
<label index="image.image_descr"/>
|
||||
<label index="imagewidth.description">Inserire la larghezza (in pixel) per visualizzare l'immagine nel Frontend del sito web.</label>
|
||||
<label index="imagewidth.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_imagewidth.seeAlso">tt_content:imageheight,
|
||||
tt_content:image</label>
|
||||
<label index="imageheight.description">Inserire l'altezza (in pixel) per visualizzare le immagini in Frontend del sito web.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_imageheight.seeAlso">tt_content:imagewidth,
|
||||
tt_content:image</label>
|
||||
<label index="imageorient.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="imageorient.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="imageborder.description">Visualizza un bordo colorato intorno all'immagine.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_imageborder.seeAlso">tt_content:imagewidth,
|
||||
tt_content:image</label>
|
||||
<label index="image_noRows.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="image_noRows.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_image_noRows.seeAlso">tt_content:imagewidth,
|
||||
tt_content:image</label>
|
||||
<label index="image_link.description">Inserire un link per l'immagine. Per immagini multiple, bisogna separare i link con le virgole.</label>
|
||||
<label index="image_link.details">Di base tutte le immagini condividono lo stesso link. Il TypoScript template dovrebbe essere configurato per consentire un link separato per ogni immagine. Se questo è il caso, si devono semplicemente separare i link con una virgola.
|
||||
|
||||
Per avere dettagli sulla sintassi guardare in basso Contenuto di Pagina > Link.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_image_link.seeAlso">tt_content:header_link,
|
||||
tt_content:image_zoom,
|
||||
tt_content:image</label>
|
||||
<label index="image_zoom.description">Quando è abilitato, cliccando su una immagine si aprirà una finestra di popup con l'immagine in formato grande.</label>
|
||||
<label index="image_zoom.details">Questa opzione sovrascrive il valore del campo Link.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_image_zoom.seeAlso">tt_content:imageheight,
|
||||
tt_content:image</label>
|
||||
<label index="image_effects.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="_image_effects.seeAlso">tt_content:image_compression,
|
||||
tt_content:image_frames,
|
||||
tt_content:image</label>
|
||||
<label index="image_frames.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="_image_frames.seeAlso">tt_content:image_compression,
|
||||
tt_content:image_effects,
|
||||
tt_content:image</label>
|
||||
<label index="image_compression.description">Seleziona la qualità e il tipo di immagine.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_image_compression.seeAlso">tt_content:image_frames,
|
||||
tt_content:image_effects,
|
||||
tt_content:image</label>
|
||||
<label index="imagecols.description">Impostare il numero di colonne quando le immagini vengono visualizzate nel Frontend del sito web.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_imagecols.seeAlso">tt_content:imagewidth,
|
||||
tt_content:image</label>
|
||||
<label index="imagecaption.description">inserire la didascalia per le immagini. Per immagini multiple, inserire una didascialia per linea</label>
|
||||
<label index="imagecaption.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_imagecaption.seeAlso">tt_content:imagewidth,
|
||||
tt_content:image</label>
|
||||
<label index="imagecaption_position.description">Allineamento dell'intestazione (sinistra, centrata, destra)</label>
|
||||
<label index="_imagecaption_position.seeAlso">tt_content:imagewidth,
|
||||
tt_content:image</label>
|
||||
<label index="cols.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="pages.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="pages.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_pages.seeAlso">tt_content:CType,
|
||||
tt_content:recursive</label>
|
||||
<label index="recursive.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="recursive.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_recursive.seeAlso">tt_content:header</label>
|
||||
<label index="menu_type.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="menu_type.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_menu_type.seeAlso">tt_content:pages,
|
||||
tt_content:sectionIndex</label>
|
||||
<label index="list_type.description">Seleziona un plugin da inserire.</label>
|
||||
<label index="list_type.details">La lista dei plugins che puoi inserire in una pagina. I plugin disponibili dipendono dalle estensioni installate.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_list_type.seeAlso">_MOD_tools_em</label>
|
||||
<label index="_list_type.image">EXT:context_help/cshimages/ttcontent_7.png</label>
|
||||
<label index="select_key.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="select_key.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_select_key.seeAlso">tt_content:list_type</label>
|
||||
<label index="table_bgColor.description">Seleziona il colore di sfondo della tabella.</label>
|
||||
<label index="table_border.description">Seleziona lo spessore del bordo della tabella.</label>
|
||||
<label index="table_cellspacing.description">Selezionare la spaziatura delle celle della tabella. </label>
|
||||
<label index="table_cellspacing.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="table_cellpadding.description">Selezionare la spaziatura delle celle della tabella. </label>
|
||||
<label index="table_cellpadding.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="media.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="multimedia.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="filelink_size.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="records.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="spaceBefore.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="_spaceBefore.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="spaceAfter.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="_spaceAfter.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="section_frame.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="_section_frame.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="sectionIndex.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="sectionIndex.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_sectionIndex.seeAlso">tt_content:list_type</label>
|
||||
<label index="linkToTop.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="rte_enabled.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="_rte_enabled.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="pi_flexform.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="pi_flexform.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_pi_flexform.seeAlso">tt_content:list_type</label>
|
||||
</languageKey>
|
||||
</data>
|
||||
</T3locallangExt>
|
||||
@@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
|
||||
<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
|
||||
<xliff xmlns:t3="http://typo3.org/schemas/xliff" version="1.0">
|
||||
<file t3:id="1415814795" source-language="en" datatype="plaintext" original="messages" date="2011-10-17T20:22:32Z" product-name="context_help" target-language="it">
|
||||
<header/>
|
||||
<body>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="hidden.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>This option disables the user group.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Questa opzione disabilita il gruppo degli utenti.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="hidden.details" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>If you disable a user group all users which are members of the group will in effect not inherit any properties this group may have given them.
|
||||
For instance if a page or content element was assigned access only by this group and you disable the group, no one would gain access to that page or content element.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Se un gruppo utenti viene disabilitato, tutti gli utenti che appartengono a quel gruppo non erediteranno alcuna proprietà del gruppo. Per esempio se una pagina o un contenuto erano accessibili solo a questo gruppo, che viene disabilitato, nessuno poi potrà ottenere l'accesso alla pagina o al contenuto.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_hidden.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="no">
|
||||
<source>fe_users:disable</source>
|
||||
<target state="needs-translation">fe_users:disable</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="title.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Name of the group.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Nome del gruppo.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="title.details" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>This title will appear as the group name in the 'Access'-list in other records.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Questo titolo apparirà come il nome del gruppo nella "Access-list" negli altri records.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="lockToDomain.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter the host name from which the group will be available only.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Inserire l'hostname da cui il gruppo sarà disponibile.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="lockToDomain.details" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>This options may be important if you have multiple websites in the same TYPO3 database but still only one main storage page for all Website users. Thus the users may log in on any of the website URLs. This may be considered a feature (having a global login as a user) or a problem (in which case you should have multiple user storages anyway). However you may wish to limit the use of a Website usergroup to a specific website and thus you don't want the group to be enabled for the user when he logs in at another URL (still from the same database of course). By entering the host name of the website here, you restrict the group to be used only from within this domain.
|
||||
|
||||
<b>Notice:</b> The use for this option is not critical if you have multiple Website user storages, namely one for each site.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Questa opzione è importante se hai siti web distinti nello stesso database di TYPO3 e dotati ancora di una sola pagina principale nella quale tutti gli utenti vengono salvati. In questo modo gli utenti dovranno fare un diverso login in ciascuno degli indirizzi associati al sito web. Questo può essere considerato una caratteristica positiva (avendo un login globale come un utente) o un problema (nel caso ci dovessero essere differenti cartelle utente). Si può voler limitare l'uso di un usergroup ad un determinato sito web, e non permettere il login da url differenti. Inserendo l'host name del sito, si fa in modo che il gruppo di utenti sia usato solo da questo dominio. <b>Nota:</b> L'uso di questa opzione non è critica se hai Website user storages multipli, ovvero una cartella-utenti per ciascun sito.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_lockToDomain.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="no">
|
||||
<source>fe_users:lockToDomain</source>
|
||||
<target state="needs-translation">fe_users:lockToDomain</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="subgroup.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Member of other groups.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Membro di altri gruppi.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="subgroup.details" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>List of other groups that this group is a member of.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Elenco degli altri gruppi di cui fa parte questo gruppo.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="description.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter a description of the group.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Inserisci la descrizione del gruppo.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="description.details" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>This is for internal use and is just a way to put a note on what the group is for, why you created it and who should be members.
|
||||
Use it as you like.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Destinato solo a uso interno; serve per inserire una nota sul gruppo, ad esempio perchè è stato creato e quali potrebbero essere i membri. Campo da riempire a piacimento.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="TSconfig.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>TSconfig for the group (advanced).</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">TSconfig per il gruppo (avanzato).</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="TSconfig.details" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>This is the user TSconfig for the group. The values are inherited by any Website user who is a member of this group.
|
||||
The configuration is subject to being overridden in other groups and by the TSconfig of the user himself.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Questo è il TSconfig per il gruppo. I valori sono ereditati da ciascun utente che è membro di questo gruppo. La configurazione può venire sovrascritta da altri gruppi e dal TSconfig dell'utente stesso.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="TSconfig.syntax" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>TypoScript syntax, without conditions and constants.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Sintassi TypoScript, senza condizioni e costanti.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_TSconfig.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="no">
|
||||
<source>fe_users:TSconfig</source>
|
||||
<target state="needs-translation">fe_users:TSconfig</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id=".description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Usergroups for Website users.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Usergroup per gli utenti web del sito.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id=".details" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>The access restriction in TYPO3 is assigned to these usergroups. When a page or other element is access restricted to a group, only Website users which are members or that group will be able to view the element on the website.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">La restrizione di accesso in TYPO3 è assegnata a questi gruppi di utenti. Quando una pagina o un altro elemento ha una restrizione d'accesso per un gruppo, solo gli utenti web che sono membri di questo gruppo potranno vedere l'elemento del sito web.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="no">
|
||||
<source>fe_users,
|
||||
About access restricting pages | http://typo3.org/documentation/document-library/doc_tut_quickstart/Create_restricted_pa/</source>
|
||||
<target state="needs-translation">fe_users,
|
||||
per l'accesso riservato alle pagine protette | http://typo3.org/documentation/document-library/doc_tut_quickstart/Create_restricted_pa/</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_.image" xml:space="preserve" approved="no">
|
||||
<source>EXT:context_help/cshimages/fegroups_3.png,
|
||||
EXT:context_help/cshimages/fegroups_4.png</source>
|
||||
<target state="needs-translation">EXT:context_help/cshimages/fegroups_3.png,
|
||||
EXT:context_help/cshimages/fegroups_4.png</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id=".image_descr" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>The form for editing frontend users groups.
|
||||
Pages, Content Elements and other records for frontend display often have a selector box where you can define access restriction by selecting access for a certain group only.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Modulo per editare i gruppi degli utenti frontend. Le Pagine, i Contenuti e altri records che vengono visualizzati nel frontend spesso hanno un selettore con il quale puoi definire le restrizioni di accesso, selezionando l'accesso solo per un determinato gruppo.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
</body>
|
||||
</file>
|
||||
</xliff>
|
||||
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
|
||||
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
|
||||
<T3locallangExt>
|
||||
<data type="array">
|
||||
<languageKey index="it" type="array">
|
||||
<label index="hidden.description">Questa opzione disabilita il gruppo degli utenti.</label>
|
||||
<label index="hidden.details">Se un gruppo utenti viene disabilitato, tutti gli utenti che appartengono a quel gruppo non erediteranno alcuna proprietà del gruppo. Per esempio se una pagina o un contenuto erano accessibili solo a questo gruppo, che viene disabilitato, nessuno poi potrà ottenere l'accesso alla pagina o al contenuto.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_hidden.seeAlso">fe_users:disable</label>
|
||||
<label index="title.description">Nome del gruppo.</label>
|
||||
<label index="title.details">Questo titolo apparirà come il nome del gruppo nella "Access-list" negli altri records.</label>
|
||||
<label index="lockToDomain.description">Inserire l'hostname da cui il gruppo sarà disponibile.</label>
|
||||
<label index="lockToDomain.details">Questa opzione è importante se hai siti web distinti nello stesso database di TYPO3 e dotati ancora di una sola pagina principale nella quale tutti gli utenti vengono salvati. In questo modo gli utenti dovranno fare un diverso login in ciascuno degli indirizzi associati al sito web. Questo può essere considerato una caratteristica positiva (avendo un login globale come un utente) o un problema (nel caso ci dovessero essere differenti cartelle utente). Si può voler limitare l'uso di un usergroup ad un determinato sito web, e non permettere il login da url differenti. Inserendo l'host name del sito, si fa in modo che il gruppo di utenti sia usato solo da questo dominio. <b>Nota:</b> L'uso di questa opzione non è critica se hai Website user storages multipli, ovvero una cartella-utenti per ciascun sito.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_lockToDomain.seeAlso">fe_users:lockToDomain</label>
|
||||
<label index="subgroup.description">Membro di altri gruppi.</label>
|
||||
<label index="subgroup.details">Elenco degli altri gruppi di cui fa parte questo gruppo.</label>
|
||||
<label index="description.description">Inserisci la descrizione del gruppo.</label>
|
||||
<label index="description.details">Destinato solo a uso interno; serve per inserire una nota sul gruppo, ad esempio perchè è stato creato e quali potrebbero essere i membri. Campo da riempire a piacimento.</label>
|
||||
<label index="TSconfig.description">TSconfig per il gruppo (avanzato).</label>
|
||||
<label index="TSconfig.details">Questo è il TSconfig per il gruppo. I valori sono ereditati da ciascun utente che è membro di questo gruppo. La configurazione può venire sovrascritta da altri gruppi e dal TSconfig dell'utente stesso.</label>
|
||||
<label index="TSconfig.syntax">Sintassi TypoScript, senza condizioni e costanti.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_TSconfig.seeAlso">fe_users:TSconfig</label>
|
||||
<label index=".description">Usergroup per gli utenti web del sito.</label>
|
||||
<label index=".details">La restrizione di accesso in TYPO3 è assegnata a questi gruppi di utenti. Quando una pagina o un altro elemento ha una restrizione d'accesso per un gruppo, solo gli utenti web che sono membri di questo gruppo potranno vedere l'elemento del sito web.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_.seeAlso">fe_users,
|
||||
per l'accesso riservato alle pagine protette | http://typo3.org/documentation/document-library/doc_tut_quickstart/Create_restricted_pa/</label>
|
||||
<label index="_.image">EXT:context_help/cshimages/fegroups_3.png,
|
||||
EXT:context_help/cshimages/fegroups_4.png</label>
|
||||
<label index=".image_descr">Modulo per editare i gruppi degli utenti frontend. Le Pagine, i Contenuti e altri records che vengono visualizzati nel frontend spesso hanno un selettore con il quale puoi definire le restrizioni di accesso, selezionando l'accesso solo per un determinato gruppo.</label>
|
||||
</languageKey>
|
||||
</data>
|
||||
</T3locallangExt>
|
||||
150
typo3conf/l10n/it/context_help/it.locallang_csh_fe_users.xlf
Normal file
150
typo3conf/l10n/it/context_help/it.locallang_csh_fe_users.xlf
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,150 @@
|
||||
<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
|
||||
<xliff xmlns:t3="http://typo3.org/schemas/xliff" version="1.0">
|
||||
<file t3:id="1415814796" source-language="en" datatype="plaintext" original="messages" date="2011-10-17T20:22:32Z" product-name="context_help" target-language="it">
|
||||
<header/>
|
||||
<body>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="username.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter the username of the website user. This is needed to login.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Digitare lo username dell'utente del sito web. Questo dato è necessario per effettuare il login.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="username.syntax" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>A username is required and must be in lowercase without spaces in it. The username must be unique among other usernames in the page where it's saved. If it is not unique a number will be prepended automatically.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Lo username è obbigatorio e deve essere digitato in caratteri minuscoli; non deve contenere spazi; deve essere un dato unico tra tutti gli altri nomi utenti presenti nella pagina dove viene salvato. Se non è unico sarà creato con l'anteposizione di n numero.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_username.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Creating Frontend Users and Groups | http://typo3.org/documentation/document-library/doc_tut_quickstart/Create_users_group/</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Per la crezione di Gruppi e Utenti di Frontend | http://typo3.org/documentation/document-library/doc_tut_quickstart/Create_users_group/</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="password.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter the password for the username above. This is needed to login.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Digita la password per lo username sopra. E' necessaria per il login.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="password.syntax" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>A password is required and must be in lowercase without spaces in it.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">La password è un dato obbligatorio e deve essere trascritta a caratteri minuscoli e non deve contenere spazi.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="usergroup.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Select a user group for the username.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Seleziona un gruppo da associare allo username.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="usergroup.details" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>When a user logs in he is able to view all content which is access restricted to the user <em>group(s)</em> the user is a member of. Therefore the user login primarily makes sense with regard to the member groups.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Quando un utente fa login potrà vedere tutti i contenuti conformemente alle restrizioni applicate al <em>gruppo(i)</em> di appartenenza. Pertanto fare login per l'utente ha senso esclusivamente se appartiene ad uno o più gruppi.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="lockToDomain.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter the host name from which the user is forced to login.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Digita il nome dell'host dal quale l'utente sarà costretto a fare login.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="lockToDomain.details" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>A TYPO3 system may have multiple domains pointing to it. Therefore this option secures that users can login only from a certain host name.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Un sistema TYPO3 può avere più domini ai quali puntare. Pertanto questa opzione si assicura che gli utenti possano fare login solamente da un dato nome di host.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="lockToDomain.syntax" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Either a domain name, "www.typo3.org" or an IP address, "10.34.222.83"</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Indica nome di dominio, es. "www.typo3.com" e/o un indirizzo IP, es. "10.34.222.83"</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_lockToDomain.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>fe_groups:lockToDomain</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">fe_groups:lockToDomain</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="name.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Enter the regular name of the user, both first- and surname.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="address.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter the street address of the user.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Digita l'indirizzo stradale dell'utente.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="www.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter the homepage URL</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Digita la pagina principale dell'utente (URL)</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="title.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter the job title, eg. 'Director' or 'Accountant'.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Digita la qualifica dell'utente (es. Direttore, Ragioniere...).</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="company.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter the name of the company in which the user is employed.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Digita il nome dela Azienda presso la quale l'utente è impiegato.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="image.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Insert a photo of the user.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Inserisci la foto dell'utente.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="disable.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>This option will temporarily disable the user from logging in.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Questa opzione disabiliterà temporaneamente il login dell'utente.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_disable.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>fe_users:starttime,fe_users:endtime</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="starttime.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter the date from which the account is active.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Inserisci la data di inizio attività del codice.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="starttime.syntax" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>The syntax is dd-mm-yy, but you can just enter a "d" in the field to insert todays date. Or "d+10" to insert the date 10 days from now etc.
|
||||
The field will re-format any input to fit the format it understands so you can just experiment and you will be able to clearly see how dates should be entered.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">La sintassi è dd-mm-yy (giorno, mese e anno), ma tu puoi inserire anche "d" nel campo per inserire la data di oggi. Anche "d+10" per inserire la data del decimo giorno in avanti a partire da oggi, ecc. Il campo modificherà qualsiasi input affinchè corrisponda al formato; puoi modificare questo campo per comprendere le potenzialità e a titolo sperimentale finchè sarai in grado di impostare quello che ritieni utile al tuo caso.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_starttime.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>fe_users:disable,fe_users:endtime</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="endtime.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter the date from which the account is disabled.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Inserisci la data dopo la quale l'account sarà disabilitato.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="endtime.syntax" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>See "Start"</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Vedi "Inizio"</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_endtime.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>fe_users:disable,fe_users:starttime</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="lastlogin.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>This field shows the user's last log in date.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Questo campo mostra l'ultima data nella quale l'utente ha fatto login.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="TSconfig.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter additional TSconfig for the user (advanced).</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Digita codice TSconfig addizionale per questo utente (funzione avanzata)</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="TSconfig.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>This field allows you to enter TypoScript style configuration values for the user. Currently there are no system defined keys. If there ever will be, they will be described in detail in the administrative documentation.
|
||||
|
||||
The primary use of this field (as well as the 'sister'-field in the Website usergroup table) is for custom purposes. In this case, you should use the root-key "user" for your customly defined values. Thus you don't risk any future system keys to interfere with your configuration.
|
||||
|
||||
You access the values of the configuration from your frontend plugins by calling the function <em>$GLOBALS["TSFE"]->fe_user->getUserTSconf()</em> which will return an array with the valuetree in it.
|
||||
|
||||
<b>Warning:</b> You should use Website user/group TSconfig in your PHP-scripts ONLY if your resulting content is NOT being cached! So call it from TypoScript USER_INT cObjects or disable caching from your PHP-code by calling <em>$GLOBALS["TSFE"]->set_no_cache();</em>
|
||||
|
||||
<b>TSconfig from Website usergroups:</b>
|
||||
Notice that the configuration from the field TSconfig in the member groups of the user is accumulated and prepended to the TSconfig of the user before it's parsed. This means for instance that a key defined in the TSconfig of the user (this field) will override the same key defined in the last (bottom) usergroup in the list which will again override the same key defined in the first (top) usergroup in the list.
|
||||
|
||||
<b>Example:</b>
|
||||
Let's imagine you want to define for a user that his name is printed in the bottom of the webpages when he is logged in. First of all you must write a PHP-function and insert the result from it as a USER_INT cObject in the bottom of the page. But your function needs to know, whether or not this user is configured to have his name printed. So you decide to use a custom TSconfig key, 'user.printUserName':
|
||||
|
||||
<em>In the TSconfig field of the user or usergroup:</em>
|
||||
|
||||
user.printUserName = 1
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<em>In your PHP-function:</em>
|
||||
|
||||
$userTSConfig = $GLOBALS["TSFE"]->fe_user->getUserTSconf();
|
||||
if ($userTSConfig["user."]["printUserName"]) {
|
||||
return $GLOBALS["TSFE"]->fe_user->user["name"];
|
||||
}</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="TSconfig.syntax" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>TypoScript syntax, without conditions and constants.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_TSconfig.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>TSconfig for TSFE | http://typo3.org/documentation/document-library/doc_core_tsconfig/TCEMAIN/
|
||||
pages:TSconfig,
|
||||
fe_groups:TSconfig,
|
||||
be_users:TSconfig,
|
||||
be_groups:TSconfig</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id=".description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>A website login user.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Sito web di login per l'utente.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id=".details" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>These are users with a username and password who are allowed specific access to otherwise restricted areas on your website.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Questi sono utenti con uno username e password che sono autorizzata ad accessi specifici ad aree protette del tuo sito.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>fe_groups
|
||||
be_users</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_.image" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>EXT:context_help/cshimages/feusers_1.png,
|
||||
EXT:context_help/cshimages/feusers_2.png,</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id=".image_descr" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Part of the form for editing a frontend user.
|
||||
A typical login box (standard) on the website where frontend users can login.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
</body>
|
||||
</file>
|
||||
</xliff>
|
||||
42
typo3conf/l10n/it/context_help/it.locallang_csh_fe_users.xml
Normal file
42
typo3conf/l10n/it/context_help/it.locallang_csh_fe_users.xml
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
|
||||
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
|
||||
<T3locallangExt>
|
||||
<data type="array">
|
||||
<languageKey index="it" type="array">
|
||||
<label index="username.description">Digitare lo username dell'utente del sito web. Questo dato è necessario per effettuare il login.</label>
|
||||
<label index="username.syntax">Lo username è obbigatorio e deve essere digitato in caratteri minuscoli; non deve contenere spazi; deve essere un dato unico tra tutti gli altri nomi utenti presenti nella pagina dove viene salvato. Se non è unico sarà creato con l'anteposizione di n numero.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_username.seeAlso">Per la crezione di Gruppi e Utenti di Frontend | http://typo3.org/documentation/document-library/doc_tut_quickstart/Create_users_group/</label>
|
||||
<label index="password.description">Digita la password per lo username sopra. E' necessaria per il login.</label>
|
||||
<label index="password.syntax">La password è un dato obbligatorio e deve essere trascritta a caratteri minuscoli e non deve contenere spazi.</label>
|
||||
<label index="usergroup.description">Seleziona un gruppo da associare allo username.</label>
|
||||
<label index="usergroup.details">Quando un utente fa login potrà vedere tutti i contenuti conformemente alle restrizioni applicate al <em>gruppo(i)</em> di appartenenza. Pertanto fare login per l'utente ha senso esclusivamente se appartiene ad uno o più gruppi.</label>
|
||||
<label index="lockToDomain.description">Digita il nome dell'host dal quale l'utente sarà costretto a fare login.</label>
|
||||
<label index="lockToDomain.details">Un sistema TYPO3 può avere più domini ai quali puntare. Pertanto questa opzione si assicura che gli utenti possano fare login solamente da un dato nome di host.</label>
|
||||
<label index="lockToDomain.syntax">Indica nome di dominio, es. "www.typo3.com" e/o un indirizzo IP, es. "10.34.222.83"</label>
|
||||
<label index="_lockToDomain.seeAlso">fe_groups:lockToDomain</label>
|
||||
<label index="name.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="address.description">Digita l'indirizzo stradale dell'utente.</label>
|
||||
<label index="www.description">Digita la pagina principale dell'utente (URL)</label>
|
||||
<label index="title.description">Digita la qualifica dell'utente (es. Direttore, Ragioniere...).</label>
|
||||
<label index="company.description">Digita il nome dela Azienda presso la quale l'utente è impiegato.</label>
|
||||
<label index="image.description">Inserisci la foto dell'utente.</label>
|
||||
<label index="disable.description">Questa opzione disabiliterà temporaneamente il login dell'utente.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_disable.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="starttime.description">Inserisci la data di inizio attività del codice.</label>
|
||||
<label index="starttime.syntax">La sintassi è dd-mm-yy (giorno, mese e anno), ma tu puoi inserire anche "d" nel campo per inserire la data di oggi. Anche "d+10" per inserire la data del decimo giorno in avanti a partire da oggi, ecc. Il campo modificherà qualsiasi input affinchè corrisponda al formato; puoi modificare questo campo per comprendere le potenzialità e a titolo sperimentale finchè sarai in grado di impostare quello che ritieni utile al tuo caso.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_starttime.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="endtime.description">Inserisci la data dopo la quale l'account sarà disabilitato.</label>
|
||||
<label index="endtime.syntax">Vedi "Inizio"</label>
|
||||
<label index="_endtime.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="lastlogin.description">Questo campo mostra l'ultima data nella quale l'utente ha fatto login.</label>
|
||||
<label index="TSconfig.description">Digita codice TSconfig addizionale per questo utente (funzione avanzata)</label>
|
||||
<label index="TSconfig.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="TSconfig.syntax"/>
|
||||
<label index="_TSconfig.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index=".description">Sito web di login per l'utente.</label>
|
||||
<label index=".details">Questi sono utenti con uno username e password che sono autorizzata ad accessi specifici ad aree protette del tuo sito.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="_.image"/>
|
||||
<label index=".image_descr"/>
|
||||
</languageKey>
|
||||
</data>
|
||||
</T3locallangExt>
|
||||
460
typo3conf/l10n/it/context_help/it.locallang_csh_pages.xlf
Normal file
460
typo3conf/l10n/it/context_help/it.locallang_csh_pages.xlf
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,460 @@
|
||||
<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
|
||||
<xliff xmlns:t3="http://typo3.org/schemas/xliff" version="1.0">
|
||||
<file t3:id="1415814797" source-language="en" datatype="plaintext" original="messages" date="2011-10-17T20:22:32Z" product-name="context_help" target-language="it">
|
||||
<header/>
|
||||
<body>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="layout.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Select a layout for the page. Any effect depends on the website template.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Seleziona il layout della pagina. Il risultato dipende dal tempalte del sito.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="layout.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>This option may not have any impact on the page design since it depends on how (and if) the front end template uses it. In most default templates it's not used.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="doktype.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Select a page type affects whether the page represents a visible webpage or is used for other purposes.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="doktype.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>'Standard' and 'Advanced' types are regular webpages, just differing in the number of options.
|
||||
'External URL' and 'Shortcut' types allows you to let a page be a shortcut to either an external URL or in the latter case a page in the page tree.
|
||||
'Not in menu' is also a regular page, but will not be shown in the navigation. <em>This page type is deprecated! Please use the "Hide in menu" option!</em>
|
||||
'Backend User Section' is an option which requires a backend user to be logged in for the page to be visible.
|
||||
|
||||
<b>Special types:</b>
|
||||
'Spacer' is only meaningfull if your frontend navigation is programmed to use it. In this case it does not represent a page with content but is intended to be a non-clickable placeholder in the navigation.
|
||||
'SysFolder' is a page type which cannot be shown as a webpage but is rather acting as a storage for records of your choice.
|
||||
'Recycler' is a garbage can. Pages and records in a recycler are not visible in the frontend.
|
||||
|
||||
<b>Notice:</b> Each type usually has a specific icon attached. Also certain types may not be available for a user (so you may experience that some of the options are not available for you!). And finally each type is configured to allow only certain table records in the page (SysFolder will allow any record if you have any problems).</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_doktype.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>pages:shortcut,
|
||||
pages:url</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="hidden.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>If this is checked, the page will be hidden on the website.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Se questa opzione è selezionata, nel sito la pagina sarà invisible.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="hidden.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>The 'Hidden', 'Start', 'Stop' and 'Access' options are all about limiting access to pages and thus they are related in functionality. In any case where a page is not visible due to one of these options, the page will not show up in the site navigation.
|
||||
Notice, these options are related <em>only</em> to the page for which they are set. If you want their effect to cover the subpages as well, you must enable the 'Include subpages' option.
|
||||
When you're logged in as a backend user you can preview hidden pages if you have read access to them.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_hidden.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>pages:starttime,pages:endtime,pages:fe_group,pages:extendToSubpages</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_hidden.image" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>EXT:context_help/cshimages/hidden_page.gif,
|
||||
EXT:context_help/cshimages/pages_1.png</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="hidden.image_descr" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>The page icon of a hidden page is dimmed and a red X is added.
|
||||
If you view a page that is hidden and you are logged in into the backend you will still be able to see the page. The red "Preview" box will tell you that this page is visible to you because of this special circumstance.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">L'icona di una pagina nascosta è offuscata con in aggiunta una X rossa.
|
||||
Se hai fatto login nel backend e visualizzi una pagina che è nascosta sarai in grado di vedere la pagina a Frontend. Il pulsante rosso "Preview" [anteprima] ti ricorderà che puoi vedere la pagina perché ti trovi in questa speciale condizione.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="starttime.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>The 'Start' time determines the date from which the page will be visible online. Use this to 'publish' the page on a certain date. If 'Start' time is not set, the page will be online instantly (unless the page is hidden otherwise).</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">"Inizio" definisce la data dalla quale la pagina sarà visibile in linea. Usa questo metodo per pubblicare la pagina a partire da una data determinata. Se "Inizio" non viene configurato la pagina sarà pubblicata immediatamente (a meno che non sia stata nascosta).</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="starttime.syntax" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Format is DD-MM-YYYY. You may enter the value in other ways - it will be evaluated immediately.
|
||||
If you insert eg. a 'd' the current date is inserted. You can also append any value in the field with eg. '+10' which will add 10 days to the current value. For instance setting the value to 'd+10' would select a date 10 days from now.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Il formato per le date e' DD-MM-YYYY. Puoi inserire un valore in altri modi - sarà valutato immediatamente.
|
||||
Se ad esempio inserisci una 'd', viene inserita la data corrente. Puoi anche aggiungere un valore nel campo, ad esempio '+10', aggiunge 10 giorni alla data corrente. Per esempio usando il valore 'd+10' la data corrisponderà a +10 giorni a partire da ora.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_starttime.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>pages:endtime,pages:hidden</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">pages:endtime,pages:hidden</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>tt_content</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">tt_content</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="endtime.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>The 'Stop' time is the date from which the page will not be online anymore.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">"Fine" è la data dalla quale la pagina non sarà più disponibile in linea.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="endtime.syntax" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>See Page / Start (click below)</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Vedi Pagina / Inizio (clicca sotto)</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_endtime.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>pages:starttime</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">pages:starttime</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="fe_group.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>If 'Access' is set to a usergroup name, only website users which are members of the selected usergroup will be able to view the page when they are logged in. The special option 'Hide at login' means the page will <em>not</em> be visible for website users that are logged in. Likewise "Show at login" will make the page visible for any logged in frontend user.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Se 'Accesso' è configurato per un gruppo di utenti, solo gli utenti del sito che sono associati al gruppo potranno veder la pagina dopo aver fatto login. L'opzione speciale 'nascondi al login' significa che la pagina <em>non</em> sarà visibile agli utenti del sito che hanno effettuato login. Analogamente "Mostra al login" renderà la pagina visibile per qualunque utente che ha fatto login.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_fe_group.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>fe_groups</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">fe_groups</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_fe_group.image" xml:space="preserve" approved="no">
|
||||
<source>EXT:context_help/cshimages/fegroups_4.png</source>
|
||||
<target state="needs-translation">EXT:context_help/cshimages/pages_2.png</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
82%</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="extendToSubpages.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>By default the Start, Stop, Access and Hidden options are effective <em>only</em> for the page on which they are set. If the option 'Include subpages' is checked for the page, then their effect is inherited by all subpages to that page.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Per default Inizio, Fine,Accesso e Nascosto sono opzioni che hanno effetto <em>solo</em> per la pagina dove sono impostate. Se l'opzione 'includi sottopagine' è selezionata, queste opzioni sono estese a tutte le sottopagine della pagina così configurata.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="extendToSubpages.details" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Consider a scenario where you want to create a whole section of subpages only visible for users which are logged in. Setting the 'Access' option for the top page in the section would affect access to that page only. So the page would not show up in the navigation unless you are logged in.
|
||||
However the subpages would still be visible if one could guess the id-number of the pages and enter it manually in the URL. But setting this option would extend the effect of the top page setting to cover all subpages as well.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Pensa a uno scenario dove vuoi creare una intera sezione di sotto-pagine visibili esclusivamente agli utenti che hanno fatto login. Configurando l'opzione 'Accesso' per la pagina in cima all'albero farà sì che solo questa pagina risulterà protetta. La pagina non sarà visibile nella navigazione (menu, mappe, ecc.) a meno che tu non abbia fatto login.
|
||||
Comunque le sotto-pagine saranno ancora visibili se viene tentato un accesso usando il numero identificativo della pagina manualmente, digitandolo nell'URL. Ma impostando questa opzione i parametri di accesso saranno estesi a tutte le sotto-pagine.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_extendToSubpages.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>pages:hidden,
|
||||
pages:starttime,
|
||||
pages:endtime,
|
||||
pages:fe_group</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">pages:hidden,
|
||||
pages:starttime,
|
||||
pages:endtime,
|
||||
pages:fe_group</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_extendToSubpages.image" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>EXT:context_help/cshimages/pages_2.png</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">EXT:context_help/cshimages/pages_2.png</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="extendToSubpages.image_descr" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>This page icon has access restricted to a certain group and "Include subpages" set as well. This is reflected in the way the icon changed look.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">L'icona della pagina ha un accesso ristretto solo a un dato gruppo e se l'opzione "Includi sotto-pagine" è selezionata. Questo si può notare dal modo in cui l'icona ha cambiato aspetto.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="alias.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>An 'alias' is a unique identification string for a page. You can use this string instead of the id-number to refer to the page.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Un 'alias' è una stringa univoca che identifica una pagina. Puoi usare questa stringa al posto del numero identificativo della pagina.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="alias.details" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Ultimately a page is identified by its id-number. For instance you may refer to a page in TYPO3 by '.../?id=123'. If the page with id '123' has the alias 'one_two_three', then the URL '.../?id=one_two_three' would display exactly the same page, because 'one_two_three' is an alias for the id '123'.
|
||||
Normally you should assign aliases only to a limited number of pages, preferably those you need to link to a lot. In most TYPO3 configurations you would be able to use the syntax '.. &lt;link one_two_three&gt;go to the page&lt;/link&gt; ..' to create a link to the page. This is easier to remember.
|
||||
Another use is if you need to change which page such a link is referring to. In that case you can delete the alias for one page and enter it for another and all links pointing to the alias would now refer to another id-number.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">In definitiva una pagina viene definita e riconosciuta univocamente dal proprio id di pagina che è un numero. Per esempio puoi far riferimento alla pagina con la sintassi '.../?id=123'. Se la pagina che ha per id '123' ha un alias che è stato definito come 'uno_due_tre' allora l'URL si presenterà in questo modo: "/?id=uno_due_tre'. Questo URL visualizzerà esattamente la stessa pagina perchè 'uno_due_tre' è un alias della pagina che ha per id: '123'.
|
||||
Normalmente dovresti assegnare un alias a un numero limitato di pagine, preferibilmente quelle che tu vuoi collegare più velocemente e in modo mnemonico. In diverse configurazione di TYPO3 potrai usare la sintassi '.. &lt;llink uno_due_tre&gt;go to the page&lt;/link&gt; ..' per creare un link ad una pagina. Questo è più facile da ricordare
|
||||
Un altro uso che puoi fare se devi modificare a quale pagina un collegamento è riferito. In questo caso puoi cancellare l'alias da una pagina e re-inserirlo in un'altra e tutti i collegamenti che puntano a quell'alias saranno riferiti al nuovo.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="alias.syntax" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>An alias can contain only lowercase alphanumeric characters and must be unique.
|
||||
Please notice: If the entered value was not unique, it will automatically be prepended with a number.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Un alias può contenere solo caratteri minuscoli alfanumerici e deve essere unico.
|
||||
Nota: se inserisci un valore non unico questo sarà automaticamente corretto precedendolo con un numero.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="target.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>The HTML target of menu items linking to this page. Also can be used for open page in popup.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Il codice HTML target delle voci di menu con link a questa pagina. Può anche essere utilizzato per aprire le pagine in popup.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="target.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Set this value only to overrule the default link, which should be configured correctly for most pages in the website TypoScript template.
|
||||
There are more options with the target field
|
||||
|
||||
Setting an integer value at the start of the field adds it as the default type for the page.
|
||||
For example, if an RSS feed is configured in Typoscript as typeNum=100, setting the target to 100 could be used to add an RSS link in the menu.
|
||||
|
||||
For open in popup use following syntax:
|
||||
400x200 - this opens page in a popup of size 400x200
|
||||
230x450:resizable=0,location=1 - opens page in popup with parameters
|
||||
|
||||
Combined:
|
||||
100 600x350 - opens page in popup with type 100
|
||||
2 _blank - opens page with target "_blank" and type 2</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="no_cache.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>This option disables server caching of the page.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Questa opzione disabilita la cache per questa pagina.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="no_cache.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Normally pages in TYPO3 are cached on the server after being constructed for the first time. This means a page is displayed much faster the second time it's requested.
|
||||
For most pages this presents no problems - rather it's boosting the performance of the website.
|
||||
However you may need to disable caching for a page if it contains dynamic content which must not be cached under any circumstances. Normally the PHP-code rendering such content is programmed to disable the caching automatically. But in any case you can force the page not to be cached via this option.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_no_cache.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>pages:cache_timeout</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">pages:cache_timeout</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="cache_timeout.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Sets the cache timeout for the page.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Definisce la scadenza per la cache di questa pagina.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="cache_timeout.details" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>By default pages last for 24 hours in the cache. After that period the page is constructed again and rewritten to the cache. Depending on your configuration, the cache may also be cleared at midnight.
|
||||
Anyhow you may here set another timeout time for the page in cache if you need to.
|
||||
This option is used quite rarely.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Per default le pagine rimangono in cache 24 ore. Dopo tale periodo la pagina viene rigenerata e scritta nuovamente nella cache. In base alla tua configurazione, la cache potrebbe anche essere cancellata a mezzanotte.
|
||||
Comunque puoi configurare una diversa scadenza per la pagina in cache, se ne hai bisogno.
|
||||
Questa opzione è usata piuttosto raramente.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_cache_timeout.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>pages:no_cache</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">pagine:no_cache</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="no_search.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>If enabled, this option excludes the page from searching operations on the website.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Se abitata, questa opzione esclude la pagina dalle elaborazioni di ricerca nel sito.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="author.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter the page authors name.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Inserisci i nomi degli autori di questa pagina.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="author.details" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Whether the author name is used or not depends on the setup of your TypoScript template.
|
||||
|
||||
- You may use it in a meta-tag.
|
||||
- If you're using TYPO3 pages as 'articles' then you could use this field to display the name of the page (article) author.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Se il nome dell'autore è usato o meno dipende dalle configurazioni applicate dal template TypoScript.
|
||||
|
||||
- Puoi usarlo nel meta-tag.
|
||||
- Se stai utilizzando le pagine come 'articoli' allora potresti usare questo campo per visualizzare il nome dell'autore della pagina (ovvero dell'articolo).</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_author.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>pages:author_email</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">pagine:author_email</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="author_email.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter the page authors email address.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Inserisci le email degli autori di questa pagina.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_author_email.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>pages:author</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="module.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Define the page as a frontend 'module'.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Definisci la pagina come un 'modulo' frontend.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="module.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>In the backend there is a module called 'Web>Modules' as well as a header 'Modules' in the 'User>Task Center'. Both functions list the available 'Frontend modules' to which the user has access.
|
||||
Basically, setting this option just marks the page so the backend knows this page contains eg. a forum or is the root page of a shopping section on the website. And based on this knowledge the backend is able to display a shortcut list as well as relevant functionality in the 'Web>Modules' module. The frontend display is - largely - not affected.
|
||||
So in effect, by 'marking' a page to be a 'Shop' module simply means it'll show up in the shortcut list of modules in the backend.
|
||||
|
||||
There may be a little more to it than this, but for details on the subject, you must refer to the administration documentation.
|
||||
|
||||
It's recommended that only admin-users are allowed access to this field!</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="media.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Attach media files related to the page.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="media.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>This fields allows you to attach various files to the page record.
|
||||
If and how these files are used depends on your template. So basically which files you attach here and in which order they must be listed is determined by your specific website template and thus you should seek instructions in the documentation for your specific website.
|
||||
As an example this field could be used from the template to allow you to attach a logo-image to the page. Or the template might be programmed to expect the first file to be an image used as a link in the navigation menu. But remember, this totally depends on how this field is used in the programming of the template.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="subtitle.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter a subtitle if needed.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Inserisci un sottotitolo, se lo vuoi.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="subtitle.details" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Whether this field is used or not depends on the template. In most cases it's not used.
|
||||
You may use this field as you like in your own templates.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">L'uso di questo campo dipende dal template. In molti casi non viene usato.
|
||||
Puoi usare questo campo come desideri nei tuoi template.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="url.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter the URL to which this page is supposed to link.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Inserisce l'URL al quale la pagina si suppone sia collegata.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="url.details" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Example: 'http://www.typo3.org' or just 'www.typo3.org' provided the 'Type' selector is set to 'http://'.
|
||||
Use the 'Type' selector to select a prefix for the URL.
|
||||
|
||||
This option is used only if the page 'Type' is set to 'External URL'.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Esempio: 'http://www.typo3.-org' o il solo 'www.typo3.org' usato nel selettore 'Type' sarà ugualmente configurato con 'http://'.
|
||||
Usa il selettore 'Type' per scegliere un prefisso per l'URL.
|
||||
|
||||
Questa opzione è usata solo se il 'Type' della pagina e' configurato come 'External URL'.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_url.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>pages:urltype</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">pages:urltype</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="shortcut.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Insert a reference to the page to which this page is supposed to be a shortcut. Requesting this ID in the frontend will redirect people to the page referred to by this value.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Inserisce un riferimento alla pagina alla quale l'attuale è associata attraverso una scorciaioia (shortcut). Chiedendo l'ID di pagina nel frontend il visitatore sarà rediretto alla pagina di destinazione associata a questo valore.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="shortcut.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Click the 'Browse for records' icon and a new window will appear in which you can easily select the page to which the shortcut is supposed to link.
|
||||
|
||||
This option is used only if the page 'Type' is set to 'Shortcut'.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_shortcut.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>pages:doktype,
|
||||
pages:shortcut_mode</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">pages:doktype,
|
||||
pages:shortcut_mode</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_shortcut.image" xml:space="preserve" approved="no">
|
||||
<source>EXT:context_help/cshimages/page_shortcut.gif</source>
|
||||
<target state="needs-translation">EXT:context_help/cshimages/pages_2.png</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
75%</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="shortcut.image_descr" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Select a page to shortcut to by the Element Browser.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="keywords.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter keywords for the page separated by commas. You may also use short phrases.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Inserisci le parole chiave di questa pagina, separate da virgole.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="keywords.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Most TYPO3 websites use these keywords in a meta-tag on the page, but you have to setup the appropriate TypoScript template yourself.
|
||||
|
||||
To optimize your page for search engines like google you should not use more than 3 to 6 keywords. You should make sure that the keywords can be found in the content of the page.
|
||||
|
||||
Note that also search engine extensions for TYPO3 (e.g. Indexed search) can be configured to make use of the keywords.
|
||||
|
||||
In TYPO3, the keywords can also be used to create a menu of related pages. Create a content element of type 'Sitemap' and then choose the menu type <i>Related pages (based on keywords)</i>.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_keywords.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>pages:description</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="description.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter a short description of the page. It will be displayed in the result lists of search engines.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Una breve descrizione della pagina.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="description.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Most TYPO3 websites insert this description in a meta-tag on the page, but you have to configure this yourself in your TypoScript template.
|
||||
|
||||
Search engines will display the description in their result list. Thus, the text should be short (about 160 characters maximum), and it's wording should make sense when it shows up in the result list.
|
||||
|
||||
Also, the description will be displayed if you create a content element of type 'Sitemap' and then choose the menu type <i>Menu of subpages to these pages (with abstract)</i>.
|
||||
|
||||
<b>Note:</b> Some search engines only use the description if the text is not found elsewhere in the content. So do not just repeat yourself.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_description.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>pages:keywords
|
||||
pages:abstract</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">pages:keywords
|
||||
pages:abstract</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="abstract.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter an abstract of the contents. It may be displayed in an overview of articles.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Inserisci un riassunto della pagina.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="abstract.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>An abstract is a short description of the page content, that might be a little longer than the one in the <i>Description</i> field.
|
||||
|
||||
Other than the description, the abstract is not meant for display in search engine result lists, but for use in your own project exclusively.
|
||||
|
||||
By default, TYPO3 lets you create a content element of type <i>Sitemap</i> and then choose <i>Menu of subpages to these pages (with abstract)</i> to create an overview of articles. If an abstract is available it will be used instead of the description.
|
||||
|
||||
<b>Note:</b> You do not have to enter the text of the description into the <i>Abstract field</i> again.
|
||||
|
||||
Of course, admins can make custom use of this field via their TypoScript templates.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_abstract.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>pages:description</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="backend_layout.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Select a backend layout for this particular page only.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="backend_layout.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>If you have created any additional backend layouts you can select them here to have the page module render the columns of this page with the selected layout.
|
||||
|
||||
Usually it will reflect the frontend layout in a way so that you will be able to recognize easily to which area of the page the content belongs.
|
||||
|
||||
You can select nothing or "none" to get the default column view of the page module for this page.
|
||||
|
||||
If you select a layout or "none", it will override any settings that might have been inherited from pages in the rootline of the current page.
|
||||
|
||||
The selection is <b>NOT</b> inherited automatically by subpages - use <b>Backend Layout (subpages of this page)</b> if you want to achieve this.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_backend_layout.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>pages:backend_layout_next_level</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">pages:backend_layout_next_level</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="backend_layout_next_level.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Select a backend layout for all subpages of this page.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="backend_layout_next_level.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>If you have created any additional backend layouts you can select them here to have the page module render the columns of the subpages of this page with the selected layout.
|
||||
|
||||
Usually it will reflect the frontend layout in a way so that you will be able to recognize easily to which area of the page the content belongs.
|
||||
|
||||
You can select nothing or "none" to get the default column view of the page module for the subpages.
|
||||
|
||||
If you select a layout or "none", it will override any settings that might have been inherited from pages in the rootline of the current page.
|
||||
|
||||
The selection is inherited automatically by all subpages - so you don't have to set it separately for each of them.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_backend_layout_next_level.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>pages:backend_layout</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="newUntil.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter the 'expiry date' of the page.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Inserisce la data di scadenza della pagina.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="newUntil.details" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>The 'expiry date' of the page has no effect on the display of the webpage. This value is rather for internal use meant as a reminder of the date when the content of this page should be revised. So if the content of the page will be outdated at a certain point in time, you could set this value to that approximate date.
|
||||
In order to obtain an overview of the expiry dates of pages, use the 'Pagetree overview' in the 'Web>Info' module.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">La 'data di scadenza' della pagina non ha effetto sulla visualizzazione della pagina. Questo è un valore per uso interno, che si intende utilizzare per ricordare la data nella quale il contenuto dovrebbe essere revisionato. Così il contenuto della pagina ad un certo punto sarà considerato superato; per farlo dovrai configurare il valore inserendo una data approssimativa.
|
||||
Per ottenere a video una panoramica delle pagine sottoposta a data di scadenza devi usare da 'Web > Info' il modulo 'Panoramica albero delle pagine'.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="newUntil.syntax" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>See Page / Start (click below)</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Vedi Pagina / inizio (clicca sotto)</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_newUntil.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>pages:starttime</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">pages:starttime</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="lastUpdated.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter the time and date of the most recent update of this page.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Inserisce il tempo e la data dell'aggiornamento più recente di questa pagina.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="lastUpdated.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>How the value of this field is used is determined by the TypoScript template of the website. First of all a 'Last updated' notice needs to be inserted on the pages and secondly the template must be configured to use this value.
|
||||
The most common use which is found in the standard templates will automatically display the last update time and date <em>unless</em> this field specifies a value in which case this value is inserted.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="lastUpdated.syntax" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Format is HH:MM DD-MM-YYYY.
|
||||
If you insert eg. a 'd' the current time and date is inserted. You can also append any value in the field with eg. '+10' which will add 10 days to the current value.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="nav_hide.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>With this option the page will be hidden in navigation menus in the frontend. The page can still be viewed if linked by its ID directly.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_nav_hide.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>pages:nav_title</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="nav_title.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Alternative title for menu items in the frontend. This value takes precedence over the page title if this value is filled in.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="content_from_pid.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>If set, this is an alternative page id from where Content Elements will be selected instead of Content Elements from the current page.
|
||||
Depends on template implementation whether this applies.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="urltype.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Set the URL prefix.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="shortcut_mode.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Select a shortcut mode. By default the shortcut page type must have a page id to jump to. Alternative methods are to go to the first subpage of a page or to a random subpage.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="mount_pid.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Mount this page id. If set it means that the subpages of this page comes from the mounted page instead.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="mount_pid.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>In the frontend this is done by adding a new variable, &MP, to the parameters which links the mounted branch to the main branch by pairing page ids.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_mount_pid.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>pages:mount_pid_ol</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="mount_pid_ol.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>If set, the mount point is "overlaid" by the mounted page. It will look like if the mount point does not exist and the mounted page is inserted in its position instead.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_mount_pid_ol.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>pages:mount_pid</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="title.description.+" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>This is normally shown in the website navigation.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="TSconfig.details.+" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source><strong>Example:</strong>
|
||||
Normally the 'Web>Page' module lets you create content in four columns, Left, Normal, Right, Border. However most websites use only a single or two columns. So some of these content columns are just taking up space and may even be confusing to users.
|
||||
If you enter this string in the 'TSconfig' field, the 'Web>Page' module will allow you to work only in the 'Normal' and 'Border' column!
|
||||
|
||||
<em>mod.web_layout.tt_content.colPos_list = 0,3</em>
|
||||
|
||||
(Must be entered in a single line!)</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="l18n_cfg.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Affect availability of pages in the various languages.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="l18n_cfg.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source><b>Hide default translation of page</b>
|
||||
If set the page is only available in one of the translations. So any attempt to access the page in the default language will show an error message.
|
||||
|
||||
<b>Hide page if no translation for current language exists</b>
|
||||
If set the page access will be blocked with an error message if there is no translation in the current language. By default access to a non-translated page will just show the default language content.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
</body>
|
||||
</file>
|
||||
</xliff>
|
||||
121
typo3conf/l10n/it/context_help/it.locallang_csh_pages.xml
Normal file
121
typo3conf/l10n/it/context_help/it.locallang_csh_pages.xml
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,121 @@
|
||||
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
|
||||
<T3locallangExt>
|
||||
<data type="array">
|
||||
<languageKey index="it" type="array">
|
||||
<label index="layout.description">Seleziona il layout della pagina. Il risultato dipende dal tempalte del sito.</label>
|
||||
<label index="layout.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="doktype.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="doktype.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_doktype.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="hidden.description">Se questa opzione è selezionata, nel sito la pagina sarà invisible.</label>
|
||||
<label index="hidden.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_hidden.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="_hidden.image"/>
|
||||
<label index="hidden.image_descr">L'icona di una pagina nascosta è offuscata con in aggiunta una X rossa.
|
||||
Se hai fatto login nel backend e visualizzi una pagina che è nascosta sarai in grado di vedere la pagina a Frontend. Il pulsante rosso "Preview" [anteprima] ti ricorderà che puoi vedere la pagina perché ti trovi in questa speciale condizione.</label>
|
||||
<label index="starttime.description">"Inizio" definisce la data dalla quale la pagina sarà visibile in linea. Usa questo metodo per pubblicare la pagina a partire da una data determinata. Se "Inizio" non viene configurato la pagina sarà pubblicata immediatamente (a meno che non sia stata nascosta).</label>
|
||||
<label index="starttime.syntax">Il formato per le date e' DD-MM-YYYY. Puoi inserire un valore in altri modi - sarà valutato immediatamente.
|
||||
Se ad esempio inserisci una 'd', viene inserita la data corrente. Puoi anche aggiungere un valore nel campo, ad esempio '+10', aggiunge 10 giorni alla data corrente. Per esempio usando il valore 'd+10' la data corrisponderà a +10 giorni a partire da ora.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_starttime.seeAlso">pages:endtime,pages:hidden</label>
|
||||
<label index="_.seeAlso">tt_content</label>
|
||||
<label index="endtime.description">"Fine" è la data dalla quale la pagina non sarà più disponibile in linea.</label>
|
||||
<label index="endtime.syntax">Vedi Pagina / Inizio (clicca sotto)</label>
|
||||
<label index="_endtime.seeAlso">pages:starttime</label>
|
||||
<label index="fe_group.description">Se 'Accesso' è configurato per un gruppo di utenti, solo gli utenti del sito che sono associati al gruppo potranno veder la pagina dopo aver fatto login. L'opzione speciale 'nascondi al login' significa che la pagina <em>non</em> sarà visibile agli utenti del sito che hanno effettuato login. Analogamente "Mostra al login" renderà la pagina visibile per qualunque utente che ha fatto login.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_fe_group.seeAlso">fe_groups</label>
|
||||
<label index="_fe_group.image">EXT:context_help/cshimages/pages_2.png</label>
|
||||
<label index="extendToSubpages.description">Per default Inizio, Fine,Accesso e Nascosto sono opzioni che hanno effetto <em>solo</em> per la pagina dove sono impostate. Se l'opzione 'includi sottopagine' è selezionata, queste opzioni sono estese a tutte le sottopagine della pagina così configurata.</label>
|
||||
<label index="extendToSubpages.details">Pensa a uno scenario dove vuoi creare una intera sezione di sotto-pagine visibili esclusivamente agli utenti che hanno fatto login. Configurando l'opzione 'Accesso' per la pagina in cima all'albero farà sì che solo questa pagina risulterà protetta. La pagina non sarà visibile nella navigazione (menu, mappe, ecc.) a meno che tu non abbia fatto login.
|
||||
Comunque le sotto-pagine saranno ancora visibili se viene tentato un accesso usando il numero identificativo della pagina manualmente, digitandolo nell'URL. Ma impostando questa opzione i parametri di accesso saranno estesi a tutte le sotto-pagine.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_extendToSubpages.seeAlso">pages:hidden,
|
||||
pages:starttime,
|
||||
pages:endtime,
|
||||
pages:fe_group</label>
|
||||
<label index="_extendToSubpages.image">EXT:context_help/cshimages/pages_2.png</label>
|
||||
<label index="extendToSubpages.image_descr">L'icona della pagina ha un accesso ristretto solo a un dato gruppo e se l'opzione "Includi sotto-pagine" è selezionata. Questo si può notare dal modo in cui l'icona ha cambiato aspetto.</label>
|
||||
<label index="alias.description">Un 'alias' è una stringa univoca che identifica una pagina. Puoi usare questa stringa al posto del numero identificativo della pagina.</label>
|
||||
<label index="alias.details">In definitiva una pagina viene definita e riconosciuta univocamente dal proprio id di pagina che è un numero. Per esempio puoi far riferimento alla pagina con la sintassi '.../?id=123'. Se la pagina che ha per id '123' ha un alias che è stato definito come 'uno_due_tre' allora l'URL si presenterà in questo modo: "/?id=uno_due_tre'. Questo URL visualizzerà esattamente la stessa pagina perchè 'uno_due_tre' è un alias della pagina che ha per id: '123'.
|
||||
Normalmente dovresti assegnare un alias a un numero limitato di pagine, preferibilmente quelle che tu vuoi collegare più velocemente e in modo mnemonico. In diverse configurazione di TYPO3 potrai usare la sintassi '.. &lt;llink uno_due_tre&gt;go to the page&lt;/link&gt; ..' per creare un link ad una pagina. Questo è più facile da ricordare
|
||||
Un altro uso che puoi fare se devi modificare a quale pagina un collegamento è riferito. In questo caso puoi cancellare l'alias da una pagina e re-inserirlo in un'altra e tutti i collegamenti che puntano a quell'alias saranno riferiti al nuovo.</label>
|
||||
<label index="alias.syntax">Un alias può contenere solo caratteri minuscoli alfanumerici e deve essere unico.
|
||||
Nota: se inserisci un valore non unico questo sarà automaticamente corretto precedendolo con un numero.</label>
|
||||
<label index="target.description">Il codice HTML target delle voci di menu con link a questa pagina. Può anche essere utilizzato per aprire le pagine in popup.</label>
|
||||
<label index="target.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="no_cache.description">Questa opzione disabilita la cache per questa pagina.</label>
|
||||
<label index="no_cache.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_no_cache.seeAlso">pages:cache_timeout</label>
|
||||
<label index="cache_timeout.description">Definisce la scadenza per la cache di questa pagina.</label>
|
||||
<label index="cache_timeout.details">Per default le pagine rimangono in cache 24 ore. Dopo tale periodo la pagina viene rigenerata e scritta nuovamente nella cache. In base alla tua configurazione, la cache potrebbe anche essere cancellata a mezzanotte.
|
||||
Comunque puoi configurare una diversa scadenza per la pagina in cache, se ne hai bisogno.
|
||||
Questa opzione è usata piuttosto raramente.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_cache_timeout.seeAlso">pagine:no_cache</label>
|
||||
<label index="no_search.description">Se abitata, questa opzione esclude la pagina dalle elaborazioni di ricerca nel sito.</label>
|
||||
<label index="author.description">Inserisci i nomi degli autori di questa pagina.</label>
|
||||
<label index="author.details">Se il nome dell'autore è usato o meno dipende dalle configurazioni applicate dal template TypoScript.
|
||||
|
||||
- Puoi usarlo nel meta-tag.
|
||||
- Se stai utilizzando le pagine come 'articoli' allora potresti usare questo campo per visualizzare il nome dell'autore della pagina (ovvero dell'articolo).</label>
|
||||
<label index="_author.seeAlso">pagine:author_email</label>
|
||||
<label index="author_email.description">Inserisci le email degli autori di questa pagina.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_author_email.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="module.description">Definisci la pagina come un 'modulo' frontend.</label>
|
||||
<label index="module.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="media.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="media.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="subtitle.description">Inserisci un sottotitolo, se lo vuoi.</label>
|
||||
<label index="subtitle.details">L'uso di questo campo dipende dal template. In molti casi non viene usato.
|
||||
Puoi usare questo campo come desideri nei tuoi template.</label>
|
||||
<label index="url.description">Inserisce l'URL al quale la pagina si suppone sia collegata.</label>
|
||||
<label index="url.details">Esempio: 'http://www.typo3.-org' o il solo 'www.typo3.org' usato nel selettore 'Type' sarà ugualmente configurato con 'http://'.
|
||||
Usa il selettore 'Type' per scegliere un prefisso per l'URL.
|
||||
|
||||
Questa opzione è usata solo se il 'Type' della pagina e' configurato come 'External URL'.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_url.seeAlso">pages:urltype</label>
|
||||
<label index="shortcut.description">Inserisce un riferimento alla pagina alla quale l'attuale è associata attraverso una scorciaioia (shortcut). Chiedendo l'ID di pagina nel frontend il visitatore sarà rediretto alla pagina di destinazione associata a questo valore.</label>
|
||||
<label index="shortcut.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_shortcut.seeAlso">pages:doktype,
|
||||
pages:shortcut_mode</label>
|
||||
<label index="_shortcut.image">EXT:context_help/cshimages/pages_2.png</label>
|
||||
<label index="shortcut.image_descr"/>
|
||||
<label index="keywords.description">Inserisci le parole chiave di questa pagina, separate da virgole.</label>
|
||||
<label index="keywords.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_keywords.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="description.description">Una breve descrizione della pagina.</label>
|
||||
<label index="description.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_description.seeAlso">pages:keywords
|
||||
pages:abstract</label>
|
||||
<label index="abstract.description">Inserisci un riassunto della pagina.</label>
|
||||
<label index="abstract.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_abstract.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="backend_layout.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="backend_layout.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_backend_layout.seeAlso">pages:backend_layout_next_level</label>
|
||||
<label index="backend_layout_next_level.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="backend_layout_next_level.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_backend_layout_next_level.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="newUntil.description">Inserisce la data di scadenza della pagina.</label>
|
||||
<label index="newUntil.details">La 'data di scadenza' della pagina non ha effetto sulla visualizzazione della pagina. Questo è un valore per uso interno, che si intende utilizzare per ricordare la data nella quale il contenuto dovrebbe essere revisionato. Così il contenuto della pagina ad un certo punto sarà considerato superato; per farlo dovrai configurare il valore inserendo una data approssimativa.
|
||||
Per ottenere a video una panoramica delle pagine sottoposta a data di scadenza devi usare da 'Web > Info' il modulo 'Panoramica albero delle pagine'.</label>
|
||||
<label index="newUntil.syntax">Vedi Pagina / inizio (clicca sotto)</label>
|
||||
<label index="_newUntil.seeAlso">pages:starttime</label>
|
||||
<label index="lastUpdated.description">Inserisce il tempo e la data dell'aggiornamento più recente di questa pagina.</label>
|
||||
<label index="lastUpdated.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="lastUpdated.syntax"/>
|
||||
<label index="nav_hide.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="_nav_hide.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="nav_title.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="content_from_pid.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="urltype.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="shortcut_mode.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="mount_pid.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="mount_pid.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_mount_pid.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="mount_pid_ol.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="_mount_pid_ol.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="title.description.+"/>
|
||||
<label index="TSconfig.details.+"/>
|
||||
<label index="l18n_cfg.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="l18n_cfg.details"/>
|
||||
</languageKey>
|
||||
</data>
|
||||
</T3locallangExt>
|
||||
120
typo3conf/l10n/it/context_help/it.locallang_csh_pageslol.xlf
Normal file
120
typo3conf/l10n/it/context_help/it.locallang_csh_pageslol.xlf
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,120 @@
|
||||
<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
|
||||
<xliff xmlns:t3="http://typo3.org/schemas/xliff" version="1.0">
|
||||
<file t3:id="1415814798" source-language="en" datatype="plaintext" original="messages" date="2011-10-17T20:22:32Z" product-name="context_help" target-language="it">
|
||||
<header/>
|
||||
<body>
|
||||
<trans-unit id=".description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Represents an alternative language for the page.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id=".details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>These records contains fields very similar to the Page records, exactly those fields which should be translated to another language in case you want a localized version of the page.
|
||||
Create only ONE Alternative Page Language record of a specific language in each page. Having more than one record will leave it uncertain which of them is used when the page is displayed.
|
||||
|
||||
Before you can create Alternative Page Language records you should create a 'master' language to be available in the root of the website ("Website Language")
|
||||
The TypoScript template must be configured to allow other languages as well.
|
||||
|
||||
Technically when an alternative language is being viewed, the content of the Alternative Page Language record is simply overlaid on the actual page records thus substituting the content of the fields in the default language.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>sys_language,
|
||||
_MOD_web_layout:language_list</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="hidden.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Use this to temporarily disable the alternative language overlay for this page.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="hidden.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Setting this option is practical in the phase of adding the extra language. When it is set, the alternative content will not be displayed unless you - as an logged in backend user - enables the Admin Panel>Preview>Show hidden records option.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_hidden.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>pages_language_overlay:starttime,
|
||||
pages_language_overlay:endtime</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="starttime.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>The 'Start' time determines the date from which the alternative language will be available online.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_starttime.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>pages_language_overlay:endtime,
|
||||
pages_language_overlay:hidden,
|
||||
pages:starttime</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="endtime.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>The 'End' time determines the date from which the alternative language will be available online.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_endtime.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>pages_language_overlay:starttime,
|
||||
pages_language_overlay:hidden,
|
||||
pages:endtime</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="title.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter the title of the alternative language.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Inserisci il titolo della lingua alternativa</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_title.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>pages:title</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="subtitle.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter the subtitle of the alternative language.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Inserisci il sottotitolo della lingua alternativa</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_subtitle.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>pages:subtitle</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="keywords.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter the keywords of the alternative language.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Inserisci le parole chiave della lingua alternativa</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_keywords.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>pages:keywords</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="description.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="no">
|
||||
<source>Enter the description of the alternative language.</source>
|
||||
<target state="needs-translation">Inserisci il titolo della lingua alternativa</target><note>82%</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_description.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>pages:description</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="abstract.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="no">
|
||||
<source>Enter the abstract of the alternative language.</source>
|
||||
<target state="needs-translation">Inserisci il titolo della lingua alternativa</target><note>85%</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_abstract.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>pages:abstract</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="author.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="no">
|
||||
<source>Enter the author of the alternative language.</source>
|
||||
<target state="needs-translation">Inserisci il titolo della lingua alternativa</target><note>88%</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_author.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>pages:author</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="author_email.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="no">
|
||||
<source>Enter the author email address of the alternative language.</source>
|
||||
<target state="needs-translation">Inserisci il titolo della lingua alternativa</target><note>88%
|
||||
76%</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_author_email.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>pages:author_email</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="media.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="no">
|
||||
<source>Enter the media files of the alternative language.</source>
|
||||
<target state="needs-translation">Inserisci il titolo della lingua alternativa</target><note>84%</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_media.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>pages:media</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="sys_language_uid.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Select the Alternative Language represented by this record.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_sys_language_uid.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>sys_language,
|
||||
sys_language:title</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="nav_title.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Enter optional navigation title of the alternative language.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
</body>
|
||||
</file>
|
||||
</xliff>
|
||||
36
typo3conf/l10n/it/context_help/it.locallang_csh_pageslol.xml
Normal file
36
typo3conf/l10n/it/context_help/it.locallang_csh_pageslol.xml
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
|
||||
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
|
||||
<T3locallangExt>
|
||||
<data type="array">
|
||||
<languageKey index="it" type="array">
|
||||
<label index=".description"/>
|
||||
<label index=".details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="hidden.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="hidden.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_hidden.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="starttime.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="_starttime.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="endtime.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="_endtime.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="title.description">Inserisci il titolo della lingua alternativa</label>
|
||||
<label index="_title.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="subtitle.description">Inserisci il sottotitolo della lingua alternativa</label>
|
||||
<label index="_subtitle.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="keywords.description">Inserisci le parole chiave della lingua alternativa</label>
|
||||
<label index="_keywords.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="description.description">Inserisci il titolo della lingua alternativa</label>
|
||||
<label index="_description.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="abstract.description">Inserisci il titolo della lingua alternativa</label>
|
||||
<label index="_abstract.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="author.description">Inserisci il titolo della lingua alternativa</label>
|
||||
<label index="_author.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="author_email.description">Inserisci il titolo della lingua alternativa</label>
|
||||
<label index="_author_email.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="media.description">Inserisci il titolo della lingua alternativa</label>
|
||||
<label index="_media.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="sys_language_uid.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="_sys_language_uid.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="nav_title.description"/>
|
||||
</languageKey>
|
||||
</data>
|
||||
</T3locallangExt>
|
||||
@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
|
||||
<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
|
||||
<xliff xmlns:t3="http://typo3.org/schemas/xliff" version="1.0">
|
||||
<file t3:id="1415814799" source-language="en" datatype="plaintext" original="messages" date="2011-10-17T20:22:32Z" product-name="context_help" target-language="it">
|
||||
<header/>
|
||||
<body>
|
||||
<trans-unit id=".description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Static templates are a centrally distributed TypoScript library. You should never change these values.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id=".details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>The Static templates are meant to be included by your TypoScript Template records depending on your needs. Refer to the 'TSref' document (see below) for details on this process.
|
||||
Notice that by each release of TYPO3 you should reinstall the Static Templates table by the install tool. See the 'Install/Upgrade' document for details (see below).</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>sys_template
|
||||
TSref | http://typo3.org/documentation/document-library/doc_core_tsref/
|
||||
TypoScript by Example | http://typo3.org/documentation/document-library/doc_core_tsbyex/
|
||||
Install/Upgrade | http://typo3.org/documentation/document-library/doc_inst_upgr/,
|
||||
sys_template:include_static</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_.image" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>EXT:context_help/cshimages/static.png</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id=".image_descr" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>The static templates are located in the page tree root where only the Admin users can access them. However they are read-only by default so you can only look at their content, not change it.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="title.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Template Title. Will be visible in the list of static templates in Template Records</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="constants.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>TypoScript Constants field</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_constants.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>sys_template:constants</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="config.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>TypoScript Setup code field</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_config.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>sys_template:config</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="include_static.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Inclusion of other static templates</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="description.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Description of the static template record.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="editorcfg.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Editor Configuration - used to configure Stylesheet editor.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
</body>
|
||||
</file>
|
||||
</xliff>
|
||||
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
|
||||
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
|
||||
<T3locallangExt>
|
||||
<data type="array">
|
||||
<languageKey index="it" type="array">
|
||||
<label index=".description"/>
|
||||
<label index=".details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="_.image"/>
|
||||
<label index=".image_descr"/>
|
||||
<label index="title.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="constants.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="_constants.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="config.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="_config.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="include_static.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="description.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="editorcfg.description"/>
|
||||
</languageKey>
|
||||
</data>
|
||||
</T3locallangExt>
|
||||
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
|
||||
<xliff xmlns:t3="http://typo3.org/schemas/xliff" version="1.0">
|
||||
<file t3:id="1415814800" source-language="en" datatype="plaintext" original="messages" date="2011-10-17T20:22:32Z" product-name="context_help" target-language="it">
|
||||
<header/>
|
||||
<body>
|
||||
<trans-unit id=".description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Determines the entrypoint of a certain host name.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id=".details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>When a TYPO3 database contains more than a single website, you'll typically have to assign a domain name to each new websites "root-page". In practice you point all the domains to the same TYPO3 database on the server, but then you insert these Domain records at the positions in the page tree where you want to direct requests to the domain. And thus pages 'outside' that point will not be accessible from that domain.
|
||||
This is like "Virtual hosts" in Apache servers.
|
||||
|
||||
(Should probably be available for admin only.)</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>sys_language
|
||||
sys_template</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="domainName.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Enter the host name, eg. "www.my-domain.com".</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="domainName.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Before a domain record will have any effect you must make sure that the domains A-record is pointed towards the server and that your server is setup to direct requests to this TYPO3 database. So basically before entering anything here, make sure a request to the domain you wish to enter arrives at the root of the current page tree.
|
||||
When you create a domain record and the host name in it (be it a real domain name or an IP address) matches the hostname of the URL, the TypoScript based front end will limit the available page to only those in the page tree from this point and outwards. In effect you will 'arrive' at the page where this record is and furthermore users cannot see pages with ids outside this branch.
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Notice, </strong>if you run TYPO3 from a subdirectory of the domain name, you must include the subdirectory as well, eg. "www.my-domain.org/typo3_subdir/"</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="redirectTo.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>All requests to the domain will be redirected to this URL, if any value is entered.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="redirectTo.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Make sure to prepend "http://" or equally to the value! Basically a "Location: " header is just issued to this value!
|
||||
<strong>Warning:</strong> You cannot use this to 'redirect' to a specific page id within the same domain as the record has! If you do that it'll just go into an endless loop because the redirect is redirecting to itself!
|
||||
|
||||
Good Example:
|
||||
Domain: "my-domain.org"
|
||||
Redirect: "www.my-domain.org"
|
||||
|
||||
This redirects requests to what is infact another domain name, namely "www.my-domain.org"
|
||||
|
||||
Bad Example:
|
||||
Domain: "www.my-domain.org"
|
||||
Redirect: "www.my-domain.org/?id=10"
|
||||
|
||||
This will go into an eternal loop because the domain name has in fact not changed!
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Virtual directories:
|
||||
If you're using TYPO3 on a unix computer you can make 'virtual subdirectories' to a website, still within the same database. See document list for more information. In that case you should enter the hostname with the subdirectory appended, like this: "my-domain.org/subdir/". If the combination of host name and current subdirectory matches the value, the domain record will be correctly detected and limit page access to the page tree below the Domain record.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="hidden.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Use this option to temporarily disable the Domain record.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="prepend_params.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>If set, any GET parameters in the calling URL will be transferred to the redirect URL.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
</body>
|
||||
</file>
|
||||
</xliff>
|
||||
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
|
||||
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
|
||||
<T3locallangExt>
|
||||
<data type="array">
|
||||
<languageKey index="it" type="array">
|
||||
<label index=".description"/>
|
||||
<label index=".details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="domainName.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="domainName.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="redirectTo.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="redirectTo.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="hidden.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="prepend_params.description"/>
|
||||
</languageKey>
|
||||
</data>
|
||||
</T3locallangExt>
|
||||
@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
|
||||
<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
|
||||
<xliff xmlns:t3="http://typo3.org/schemas/xliff" version="1.0">
|
||||
<file t3:id="1415814801" source-language="en" datatype="plaintext" original="messages" date="2011-10-17T20:22:32Z" product-name="context_help" target-language="it">
|
||||
<header/>
|
||||
<body>
|
||||
<trans-unit id=".description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>File storage, which acts as an entry root point to a file-based structure. See it like a drive or a hard drive volume in your local machine.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id=".details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source/>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="hidden.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Disabling the storage will result in removing it from any listings in the backend. Existing file relations will still exist.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="hidden.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>If you set up a file storage, it will show up on any folder lists, thus allowing to basically browse through the files in this file repository. If you set this checkbox, this storage will be excluded from any listings in the backend. Any existing file references will still exist further.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="name.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>The visible identifier for this file storage.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="name.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>The label entered here will be shown as the name for the entry point in the TYPO Backend. Be sure to make it descriptive and logical for your editors.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="description.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>A description of this storage.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="description.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>This description field is used to explain e.g. the location of the storage, also what this storage is meant for or what it contains.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="driver.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Choose the driver as the technical backbone of the storage. Once you've chosen a driver, and saved it, additional configuration will show up.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="driver.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>The driver is the technical background of a storage, and thus also defines whether the location of the storage is local (= on the same machine as this TYPO3 installation) or remote like a WebDAV server connection. Search for extensions in the TYPO3 Extension Repository that extend this driver list.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="processingfolder.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Defines the directory on this storage to be used to save temporary files like resized images. When on a different storage make sure that the folder exists and is writable.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="is_browsable.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>If set, backend users can browse through this storage. Otherwise it will show up as a unselectable item in the list.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="is_public.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>If set, then the files in this storage can be linked directly from the outside world. If this is not set, make sure to provide additional possibilities to access the files in this storage.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="is_writable.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>If set, then users are allowed to modify, add, delete files/folders on this storage.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="is_online.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>This flag is usually set. If TYPO3 cannot connect to this storage (because it maybe temporary down), then the flag will be checked, and the storage will behave like it is non-browsable in the TYPO3 backend. The admin needs to manually activate it again if it was offline.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
</body>
|
||||
</file>
|
||||
</xliff>
|
||||
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
|
||||
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
|
||||
<T3locallangExt>
|
||||
<data type="array">
|
||||
<languageKey index="it" type="array">
|
||||
<label index=".description"/>
|
||||
<label index=".details"/>
|
||||
<label index="hidden.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="hidden.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="name.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="name.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="description.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="description.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="driver.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="driver.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="processingfolder.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="is_browsable.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="is_public.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="is_writable.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="is_online.description"/>
|
||||
</languageKey>
|
||||
</data>
|
||||
</T3locallangExt>
|
||||
136
typo3conf/l10n/it/context_help/it.locallang_csh_systmpl.xlf
Normal file
136
typo3conf/l10n/it/context_help/it.locallang_csh_systmpl.xlf
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,136 @@
|
||||
<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
|
||||
<xliff xmlns:t3="http://typo3.org/schemas/xliff" version="1.0">
|
||||
<file t3:id="1415814802" source-language="en" datatype="plaintext" original="messages" date="2011-10-17T20:22:32Z" product-name="context_help" target-language="it">
|
||||
<header/>
|
||||
<body>
|
||||
<trans-unit id=".description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>TypoScript template record.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id=".details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>The 'Template' records are the vital components used to set the design of the webpages. No matter how (almost) you would like to build your website, it must be initiated by a 'Template' record placed in the root of the page tree of the site.
|
||||
Basically, create a 'Template' record, enter a title and make sure to check of Clear constants, setup and Rootline. Then enter some TypoScript configuration in the Setup field and you're set.
|
||||
It's very important to read how to do all this in the documents listed below! Also make sure you use the Web>Template module to do all the working with templates. It's a specialized tool to help you with this.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>static_template
|
||||
TSref | http://typo3.org/documentation/document-library/doc_core_tsref/
|
||||
TypoScript by Example | http://typo3.org/documentation/document-library/doc_core_tsbyex/</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_.image" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>EXT:context_help/cshimages/systemplate.png,
|
||||
EXT:context_help/cshimages/systemplate1.png</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id=".image_descr" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>A Template Record with constants and setup code.
|
||||
The Web>Template module contains tools which will help you to edit and validate TypoScript structures.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="hidden.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Hiding the template will deactivate the template record.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="hidden.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>If the Template Record was the first record on a page hiding it will expose the second record on the page instead.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="starttime.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Start time. Use this to enable a template on a certain date.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="endtime.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>End time. Use this to disable a template on a certain date.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="title.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>The title of the template record is only an internal label and does not have any effect on the output in the frontend.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="sitetitle.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Website title. Typically this will automatically be prefixed all page titles in the <title> tag of the frontend pages.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="constants.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>TypoScript Constants.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_constants.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>static_template:constants</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="config.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>TypoScript Setup code</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="config.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Read more about TypoScript Templates in TSref, TypoScript by Example and Getting Started.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_config.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>static_template:config,
|
||||
TSref | http://typo3.org/documentation/document-library/doc_core_tsref/
|
||||
Getting Started | http://typo3.org/documentation/document-library/doc_tut_quickstart/
|
||||
TypoScript by Example | http://typo3.org/documentation/document-library/doc_core_tsbyex/
|
||||
TypoScript Syntax | http://typo3.org/documentation/document-library/doc_core_ts/</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">A part of this string is an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy this part into the translation field and do not change it. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="resources.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Resource files for the template. For example a logo, a TTF-font etc.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="resources.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Resource files can be referenced in TypoScript Template code by [filename]*.[ext] and has the advantage that the reference from TypoScript is not broken if you copy or export a Template Record where the resources ends up with new names.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="clear.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Flags that will clear the inheritance of TypoScript code from former templates in the root line. There is a flag for Constants and one for Setup code.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="clear.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>In the Web > Template / Template Analyser module you can see how far back in the template tree that constants and setup code is inherited.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_clear.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>sys_template:root</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_clear.image" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>EXT:context_help/cshimages/systemplate2.png</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="root.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Defines that the template represents a root of a website.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_root.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>sys_template:clear</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="includeStaticAfterBasedOn.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>If set, static templates will be included after "based-on" templates. It basically swaps the order of inclusion of these external TypoScript sources.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="includeStaticAfterBasedOn.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>The Web > Template / Template Analyser module allows you to view the order of inclusion of all TypoScript sources your template uses.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="include_static.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Static Template records to include.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_include_static.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>static_template</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="include_static_file.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Static Template files to include.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="include_static_file.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Static template files are registered by extensions contrary to Static Template records which come from the static database table, "static_template".</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_include_static_file.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>sys_template:include_static</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="basedOn.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Other Template Records that are included like "static templates".</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="static_file_mode.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Define the mode of inclusion of static template files.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="static_file_mode.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>If you are in doubt about the inclusion order, make sure to use the Web > Template / Template Analyser to view the order.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="nextLevel.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Defines a template record to make active one level out in the page tree of this branch. This can be used to define another template record for the general website while having a special template for the frontpage.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="description.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Enter a description of the template if you like.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="editorcfg.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Editor Configuration for the stylesheet editor extension.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
</body>
|
||||
</file>
|
||||
</xliff>
|
||||
44
typo3conf/l10n/it/context_help/it.locallang_csh_systmpl.xml
Normal file
44
typo3conf/l10n/it/context_help/it.locallang_csh_systmpl.xml
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
|
||||
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
|
||||
<T3locallangExt>
|
||||
<data type="array">
|
||||
<languageKey index="it" type="array">
|
||||
<label index=".description"/>
|
||||
<label index=".details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="_.image"/>
|
||||
<label index=".image_descr"/>
|
||||
<label index="hidden.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="hidden.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="starttime.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="endtime.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="title.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="sitetitle.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="constants.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="_constants.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="config.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="config.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_config.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="resources.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="resources.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="clear.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="clear.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_clear.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="_clear.image"/>
|
||||
<label index="root.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="_root.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="includeStaticAfterBasedOn.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="includeStaticAfterBasedOn.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="include_static.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="_include_static.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="include_static_file.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="include_static_file.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_include_static_file.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="basedOn.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="static_file_mode.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="static_file_mode.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="nextLevel.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="description.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="editorcfg.description"/>
|
||||
</languageKey>
|
||||
</data>
|
||||
</T3locallangExt>
|
||||
780
typo3conf/l10n/it/context_help/it.locallang_csh_ttcontent.xlf
Normal file
780
typo3conf/l10n/it/context_help/it.locallang_csh_ttcontent.xlf
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,780 @@
|
||||
<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
|
||||
<xliff xmlns:t3="http://typo3.org/schemas/xliff" version="1.0">
|
||||
<file t3:id="1415814803" source-language="en" datatype="plaintext" original="messages" date="2011-10-17T20:22:32Z" product-name="context_help" target-language="it">
|
||||
<header/>
|
||||
<body>
|
||||
<trans-unit id=".description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>All visible content on webpages in TYPO3 is typically made by "Page content" records. They are typically referred to as "Content Elements". Often Content Elements are managed by the "Page" module which is designed to handle Content Elements in multiple columns and languages.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Tutto il contenuto visibile nelle pagine di TYPO3 è costituito tipicamente da records di "Contenuto di Pagina" ("Page Records"). Essi fanno tipicamente riferimento a "Elementi di contenuto". Spesso gli elementi di contenuto sono gestiti dal modulo "Pagina" che è stato progettato per gestire gli elementi di contenuto in colonne multiple e nelle varie lingue.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id=".details" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>"Page content" records is ordered and can thus be rearranged. Also notice that the "Language" and "Column" selector of the "Page content" records determines where and in which situation they appear. If you do not change the value of the "Language" and "Column" selectors you are most sure that the element will appear by default.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">I records di "Contenuto di Pagina" sono disposti in un certo ordinee pertanto possono essere riposizionati. Nota anche che il selettore "Lingua" e "Colonna" dei records di "Contenuto di pagina" determina dove e in quale situazione deve apparire. Se tu non cambi il valore del selettore "Lingua" e "Colonne" sei maggiormente certo che l'elemento apparirà per default.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Page Content principles | http://typo3.org/documentation/document-library/doc_tut_quickstart/Page_content/,
|
||||
_MOD_web_layout</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_.image" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>EXT:context_help/cshimages/ttcontent_1.png,
|
||||
EXT:context_help/cshimages/ttcontent_2.png,
|
||||
EXT:context_help/cshimages/ttcontent_3.png</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id=".image_descr" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>The Page module is used to manage Content Elements effectively as they appear arranged in columns and languages.
|
||||
A Content Element has a large editing form with many options. The "Type" determines which options are visible.
|
||||
In the frontend - on the webpage - a Content Element like the above could look like this.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Il modulo Pagina è usato per gestire gli elementi di Contenuto effettivamente come essi appaiono disposti nelle varie colonne e lingue. Un elemento di contenuto ha numerose opzioni e modalità di modifica. "Tipo" determina quale opzioni sono visibili. Nel frontend -- in una pagina web - un elemento di Contenuto come quello sopra potrebbe apparire allo stesso modo.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="CType.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Select the kind of page content this element represents. New options will appear when you save the record.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Seleziona il tipo di contenuto di pagina che l'elemento rappresenta. Nuove opzioni appariranno una volta memorizzato.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="CType.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>The 'Type' of content you select determines which options you have in the editform, so make sure to save the record before you make changes.
|
||||
|
||||
This is a description of the various types:
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Header</strong>
|
||||
This type allows you insert a standard content element header and nothing more.
|
||||
Almost all the other types described below also includes the header with the exact same options. So the Header type just provides a way to insert a header <em>only</em> without anything else.
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Text</strong>
|
||||
The Text type allows you to insert regular page content.
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Text & Images</strong>
|
||||
This is the same as the Text type (regular page content) but with the option of attaching images.
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Images</strong>
|
||||
The same as Text & Images but without the text field - so only images.
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Bullet list</strong>
|
||||
Lets you create a bullet list. Each line in the text-field will appear as a single line in the bulletlist.
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Table</strong>
|
||||
Lets you create <em>simple</em> tables. Each line represents a tablerow and vertical bars '|' separates each column.
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Filelinks</strong>
|
||||
Allows you to present a list of files for download. You can have thumbnails attached to the list including filesize.
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Multimedia</strong>
|
||||
Lets you insert multimedia elements such as sound, video, java applets and flash animations.
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Form</strong>
|
||||
Lets you create mail forms. There is a special syntax to use when you wish to create form fields.
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Search</strong>
|
||||
This inserts a search box and it will also display the search result if a query is performed to the page.
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Login</strong>
|
||||
Displays a login box for website users. You must create at least one Website user and user group before this makes any sense to use.
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Textbox</strong>
|
||||
This is mainly for customly defined design which includes typically some text and an image. So in other words the function is not generally defined. However the default subtypes will let you choose various ways to display some text with an image.
|
||||
Use only if instructed to.
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Menu/Sitemap</strong>
|
||||
Offers a selection of various link menus and a sitemap you can insert on a page.
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Insert records</strong>
|
||||
This is a placeholder for other records. In other words, by this element you can attach other content elements from elsewhere and thus insert them this page.
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Insert plugin</strong>
|
||||
This will allow you to insert a forum, guestbook, list of addresses, shopping basket etc. The various features are available <em>only</em> if they are configured correctly in the template of your website. So before you use it, make sure this is the case.
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>HTML</strong>
|
||||
This is plain HTML content. Everything put here will be displayed directly on the page without any preprocessing.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_CType.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:colPos,
|
||||
tt_content:sys_language_uid,
|
||||
About Content Elements | http://typo3.org/documentation/document-library/doc_tut_quickstart/Content_element_type/</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">A part of this string is an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy this part into the translation field and do not change it. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_CType.image" xml:space="preserve" approved="no">
|
||||
<source>EXT:context_help/cshimages/ttcontent_4.png</source>
|
||||
<target state="needs-translation">EXT:context_help/cshimages/ttcontent_7.png</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
97%</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="hidden.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Check this box if you wish to hide the content element from being displayed.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Scegli questa opzione se desideri nascondere l'elemento di contenuto in modo che non sia visualizzato.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_hidden.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:starttime,
|
||||
tt_content:endtime,
|
||||
tt_content:fe_group,
|
||||
tt_content:colPos,
|
||||
tt_content:sys_language_uid</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="starttime.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter the date from which the content element will be visible.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Inserisci la data dalla quale l'elemento di contenuto sarà visibile.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_starttime.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>pages:starttime,
|
||||
tt_content:endtime,
|
||||
tt_content:hidden,
|
||||
tt_content:fe_group</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="endtime.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter the date from which the content element will disappear from the website.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Inserisci la data dalla quale l'elemento di contenuto sparirà dal sito.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_endtime.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>pages:endtime,
|
||||
tt_content:starttime,
|
||||
tt_content:hidden,
|
||||
tt_content:fe_group</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="fe_group.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Select a Website usergroup which is exclusively allowed to view the element.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Seleziona un gruppo del sito web che avrà accesso esclusivo per vedere l'elemento.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="fe_group.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>The options in this box depends on which Website usergroups are created and available for you. When you select a user group here, the content element will no longer be visible to users which are not logged in. Only Website users which are logged in and members of the group you selected will be allowed to see the element.
|
||||
If you select "Hide at login" the effect is kind of reversed in that the element <em>disappears</em> if <em>any</em> Website user is logged in. This is useful if you want to present information like "How to login" and such which is irrelevant if a user is finally logged in.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_fe_group.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:hidden,
|
||||
tt_content:starttime,
|
||||
tt_content:endtime,
|
||||
pages:fe_group,
|
||||
fe_users,
|
||||
fe_groups</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="sys_language_uid.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Select the system language of this element. <strong>Notice</strong> this will affect whether the element is visible.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Seleziona il linguaggio di sistema per questo elemento. <strong>Attenzione</strong> questa opzione influenza la visibilità dell'elemento.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="sys_language_uid.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>This allows you to assign a specific language to the content element. If you select anything but the default value, the element will <em>not</em> be visible unless the language assigned is also configured by the TypoScript template.
|
||||
The available system languages are created by the administrator.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_sys_language_uid.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:colPos,
|
||||
sys_language,
|
||||
Localization concepts [Technical] | http://typo3.org/documentation/tips-tricks/multi-language-sites-in-typo3/,
|
||||
_MOD_web_layout:language_list</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">A part of this string is an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy this part into the translation field and do not change it. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="layout.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Select a layout.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Seleziona un layout</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="layout.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>This option is not used in the default templates but may be used by any custom rendering.
|
||||
|
||||
There are a number of default implementations depending on the content element type:
|
||||
|
||||
<b>"Filelinks":</b>
|
||||
"Normal" will provide a list of filelinks with no thumbnail.
|
||||
"Layout 1" adds a file icon to the left of the link
|
||||
"Layout 2" adds a thumbnail if the file is an image file and if not an icon. A black border is wrapped around.
|
||||
"Layout 3" is like Layout 2, but without the black border.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="colPos.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Select the column position this element. <strong>Notice</strong> this will affect whether the element is visible.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="colPos.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Most websites use only one column of content. However some templates lets you put content in multiple columns and this option allows you to select another column for the element.
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Notice</strong> that selecting another column than "Normal" will make the content element disappear unless that column is also displayed in the website template. If your content element is 'strangely' not visible please make sure the Column and Language selectors are set correctly.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_colPos.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:sys_language_uid,
|
||||
_MOD_web_layout:columns_multi,
|
||||
_MOD_web_layout:columns_single</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="date.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter a date to be displayed above the header.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Inserisci una data da visualizzare sopra l'header</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="header.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Enter a headline for the content element.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="header.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Almost all content elements (except the HTML type for instance) will display this header above the content. If you don't want a header displayed, select the header Layout to "Hidden". Alternatively you can choose not to enter any content in this field.
|
||||
|
||||
Some content element types do not display the header by default. In those cases the Header field is typically labeled "Name" instead. One of these are the HTML type content element.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_header.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:header_position,
|
||||
tt_content:header_link,
|
||||
tt_content:header_layout,
|
||||
tt_content:date,</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_header.image" xml:space="preserve" approved="no">
|
||||
<source>EXT:context_help/cshimages/ttcontent_6.png</source>
|
||||
<target state="needs-translation">EXT:context_help/cshimages/ttcontent_7.png</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
97%</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="header_position.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Places the header to the left, centered or to the right.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Posiziona l'header a sinistra, in centro o a destra.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_header_position.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="no">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:header</source>
|
||||
<target state="needs-translation">tt_content:pages</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
76%</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="header_link.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Creates a link from the header. Insert a page id, email address or URL.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="header_link.syntax" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>If you insert an id-number, eg. "51", the link will refer to page with id=51 <em>inside</em> TYPO3.
|
||||
If you insert an email address, eg. "name@my-domain.test", the link will point to that email address.
|
||||
If you insert an URL or domain, eg. "www.typo3.org" or "http://www.my-domain.org", the link will point to that website.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_header_link.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="no">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:header</source>
|
||||
<target state="needs-translation">tt_content:pages</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
76%</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="header_layout.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Select a visual design for the header.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Seleziona un formato per l'header.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="header_layout.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>If you select "Default" the standard design (which is one of the layouts 1-5) will be used.
|
||||
Alternatively you can select from Layout 1 through 5 which are configured in the website template with individual visual designs.
|
||||
If you select "Hidden" the header will simply not appear. This is useful if you wish a header for the content element (in order to identify it in the backend) but do not wish the header to be displayed on the website.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_header_layout.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="no">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:header</source>
|
||||
<target state="needs-translation">tt_content:pages</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
76%</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="subheader.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter a subheader. This is displayed below the ordinary headline. If the content element type is "Form" this field is the recipient email.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Inserire una sottotestata (subheader). Questa viene visualizzata sotto il titolo di testa. Se il tipo di contenuto e' "Form" il campo sarà l'email del destinatario.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="subheader.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>A subheader is displayed only with the "Header" content element type.
|
||||
|
||||
<b>Notice:</b> When using the content element type "Form", this field is named 'Recipient-email:' and contains the email address of the form mail recipient. It's therefore important to allow access to this field for the users.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_subheader.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:header
|
||||
tt_content:bodytext</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="bodytext.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter the body text.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Inserisci il testo principale.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="bodytext.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Here you enter the body text of the content element. Usually you can use some HTML formatting tags, if you're using Internet Explorer you can even format the content visually.
|
||||
The field is reused in most other types and so switching between the content element types will bring the value of this field with it.
|
||||
|
||||
When you're using this field with the "Text" and "Text & Images" types, the content is used as ordinary body text. Each linebreak normally signifies a new paragraph, you can use the special TYPO3 tag, &lt;LINK&gt;, for making links. You can use many HTML tags but there are limitations as well. This will depend on the implementation.
|
||||
|
||||
<b>Bulletlists:</b>
|
||||
If the type is "Bulletlist" each line in this field is a bulletlist entry.
|
||||
|
||||
<b>Tables:</b>
|
||||
If the type is "Table" each line represents a table row. Within each line you divide the columns by inserting a vertical bar, |. So making a table row with 3 columns could look like "This is column 1 | Column 2 here | Third column!". Use the table wizard for creating tables - that is much easier than "coding" them.
|
||||
|
||||
<b>Parameters:</b>
|
||||
Types like "Script", "Form" and "Multimedia" use this field for parameters you can pass to the element. And the "HTML" type accepts any input as raw HTML which is simply displayed on the website without any preprocessing.
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Rich Text Editor:</strong>
|
||||
With the types "Text" and "Text & Images" the Rich Text editor is used for editing if your browser supports it and the editor is generally enabled in the system. Be aware that the content is "cleansed" before it goes into the database when you're using the "Text" and "Text & Images" types.
|
||||
|
||||
<b>Making a mail form:</b>
|
||||
When you have selected the content element type "Form" you should enter lines of parameters into this field. This is a brief example:
|
||||
|
||||
Your name: | *name=input,40 | [Enter name!]
|
||||
Your email: | *email=input,40
|
||||
Your address: | address=textarea,40,10
|
||||
Your haircolor: |hair=radio|Blue=blue, Red=red
|
||||
|
||||
|formtype_mail = submit | Send form
|
||||
|subject=hidden| Enter a subject here!
|
||||
|html_enabled=hidden | 1
|
||||
|
||||
The first two lines makes input-fields for name and email, both are marked "required" by the * and the name field has a default value of "[Enter name!]".
|
||||
The third line is a text box and the fourth makes radiobuttons to select haircolor.
|
||||
Then there are three important lines in the end. The first makes a submit button with the label "Send form", the second line is the subject of the email the receiver gets and the third line makes the form result render in an HTML-table.
|
||||
It is much easier to use the Form Wizard for creating forms.
|
||||
|
||||
<b>Notice:</b> Before any form will ever work, you must enter a recipient email address. The "Recipient-email:" field is used for that (this is in fact the Subheader field used!).</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_bodytext.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:CType,
|
||||
tt_content:subheader,
|
||||
xMOD_csh_corebe:wizard_forms_wiz,
|
||||
xMOD_csh_corebe:wizard_table_wiz</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="image.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Insert one or more images.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Inserisce una o più immagini.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="image.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>You can attach images to the content element and almost as many as you like.
|
||||
Depending on the configuration of TYPO3 you can even attach them in any format you like. Especially you do not need to worry about size and compression because these factors are normally handled by TYPO3 internally.
|
||||
|
||||
When you use the "Text & Images" type, it's important to select a proper position of the image block. For this purpose, use the Position selector which is displayed below (or if you click in the image list field in the Classic backend). See link to "Page content / Position" below.
|
||||
You can also display images in multiple columns and enable an option which enables a link so you can click the image and see a bigger version. Just to name a few options.
|
||||
Most likely you don't have all options available. This depends on your permissions in the system.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_image.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:imagewidth,
|
||||
tt_content:imageheight,
|
||||
tt_content:imageorient,
|
||||
tt_content:imageborder,
|
||||
tt_content:image_noRows,
|
||||
tt_content:image_link,
|
||||
tt_content:image_zoom,
|
||||
tt_content:imagecols,
|
||||
tt_content:imagecaption,
|
||||
tt_content:image_effects,
|
||||
tt_content:image_frames,
|
||||
tt_content:image_compression,
|
||||
Using images ("Getting Started") | http://typo3.org/documentation/document-library/doc_tut_quickstart/Managing_files_in_TY/
|
||||
Using images (Animation) | FILE:EXT:welcome/modsub/ani_10.gif</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">A part of this string is an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy this part into the translation field and do not change it. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_image.image" xml:space="preserve" approved="no">
|
||||
<source>EXT:context_help/cshimages/ttcontent_5.png</source>
|
||||
<target state="needs-translation">EXT:context_help/cshimages/ttcontent_7.png</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
97%</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="image.image_descr" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>This shows all the options related to inserting images in Content Elements. You might not be able to use all of them.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="imagewidth.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter the width in pixels of the image.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Inserisce la larghezza in pixel dell'immagine.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="imagewidth.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>The template is normally configured to a max width of an image and so you don't need to specify the width if the image fits perfectly into those dimensions. However this does give you an opportunity to specify a specific width.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_imagewidth.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:imageheight,
|
||||
tt_content:image</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">tt_content:imageheight,
|
||||
tt_content:image</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="imageheight.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter the height of the image in pixels.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Inserisci l'altezza in pixel dell'immagine.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_imageheight.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:imagewidth,
|
||||
tt_content:image</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">tt_content:imagewidth,
|
||||
tt_content:image</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="imageorient.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Select the position of the imageblock relative to the body text.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Seleziona la posizione delle immagini in relazione al testo principale.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="imageorient.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>The position above and below the body text is pretty straight forward.
|
||||
The options "In text" means that the image block is displayed with text aside it. When you select this option the template will probably force the images into smaller dimensions because they cannot take up the same space when text is supposed to float around them.
|
||||
When you select "In text" you can choose the options either above or below the divider "No wrap". If you select the "In text" option above, the bodytext will float <em>under</em> the image block when the bodytext reaches the end of the image block. So in other words the body text <em>wraps around</em> the image block. If you select "In text" below the "No wrap" divider, the body text will not float under the image block, but simply continue in its column.
|
||||
Apart from the visual difference there is a technical aspect as well. Because if you choose to allow the content to wrap the image block you will experience a strange phenomenon when you do not have enough bodytext to make it float around the image: You experience that the subsequent content elements on the page is somehow layered on top of the image block - and this certainly looks like a bug. However it's easily solved by changing the "In text" position to the equal value but below the "No wrap" divider.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="imageborder.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Check this, if you wish a colored border around the images.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Seleziona questo se vuoi un bordo colorato intorno alle immagini.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_imageborder.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:imagecols,
|
||||
tt_content:image</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">tt_content:imagecols,
|
||||
tt_content:image</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="image_noRows.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Disables strict tablerows in the image block.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="image_noRows.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>This options is kind of hard to explain, but imagine you have 2 or more columns <em>and</em> rows of images. If one image in the upper row is a bit taller than the second this will generate an empty extra space beneath the second image. This is due to the normal procedure in which the images are placed in a table cell each.
|
||||
If you set this option, the table will place all images in a column in a single table cell which make the distance between them vertically identical throughout. This may provide a better look if the alternative looks stupid.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_image_noRows.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:imagecols,
|
||||
tt_content:image</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">tt_content:imagecols,
|
||||
tt_content:image</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="image_link.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter a link for the images.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Inserisci un link per le immagini.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="image_link.details" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>By default all images share the same link. However you may ask the administrator to configure the TypoScript template to allow a separate link for each image. If this is the case, you simply separate the link values by a comma.
|
||||
|
||||
See Page content>Link below for details on syntax.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Per default tutte le immagini condividono lo stesso link. Tuttavia è possibile configurare il template Typoscript per consentire l'utilizzo di un link separato per ogni immagine. In questo caso i valori dei link vanno separati con una virgola.
|
||||
|
||||
Vedi Page content > Link per maggiori informazioni circa questa sintassi.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_image_link.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:header_link,
|
||||
tt_content:image_zoom,
|
||||
tt_content:image</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">tt_content:header_link,
|
||||
tt_content:image_zoom,
|
||||
tt_content:image</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="image_zoom.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Check this option, and the image will link to a new window with a bigger version.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Selezionando questa opzione, cliccando sulle immagini si aprirà una nuova finestra con l'iimagine in dimensioni maggiori.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="image_zoom.details" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>This option overrides the value in the Link-field.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Questa opzione sovrascrive il valore nel campo Link</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_image_zoom.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:image_link,
|
||||
tt_content:image</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">tt_content:image_link,
|
||||
tt_content:image</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="image_effects.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Select special image processing effects.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_image_effects.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:image_compression,
|
||||
tt_content:image_frames,
|
||||
tt_content:image</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">tt_content:image_compression,
|
||||
tt_content:image_frames,
|
||||
tt_content:image</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="image_frames.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Select special image framing options.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_image_frames.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:image_compression,
|
||||
tt_content:image_effects,
|
||||
tt_content:image</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">tt_content:image_compression,
|
||||
tt_content:image_effects,
|
||||
tt_content:image</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="image_compression.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Select compression/quality options.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Seleziona le opzioni per la compressione/qualità</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_image_compression.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:image_frames,
|
||||
tt_content:image_effects,
|
||||
tt_content:image</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">tt_content:image_frames,
|
||||
tt_content:image_effects,
|
||||
tt_content:image</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="imagecols.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Select the number of columns in the image block.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Seleziona il numero di colonne per il blocco immagini</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_imagecols.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:image_noRows,
|
||||
tt_content:image</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">tt_content:image_noRows,
|
||||
tt_content:image</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="imagecaption.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter a caption for the image block</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Inserisci una didascalia per l'immagine</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="imagecaption.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>By default the caption is positioned below the whole image block. However your website template may be configured to allow individual image captions by setting "styles.content.imgtext.captionSplit=1" in your template constants.
|
||||
In that case each line in this field will be the image caption of the corresponding image in the list.
|
||||
|
||||
The caption text field is also used by the content element type "Filelinks" where each line represents a description of a file in the list.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_imagecaption.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:imagecaption_position,
|
||||
tt_content:image</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">tt_content:imagecaption_position,
|
||||
tt_content:image</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="imagecaption_position.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Places the image caption to the left, centered or to the right.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Posiziona la didascalia a sinistra, in centro o a destra.</target><note>82%</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_imagecaption_position.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:imagecaption,
|
||||
tt_content:image</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">tt_content:imagecaption,
|
||||
tt_content:image</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="cols.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Select a fixed number of table columns</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Seleziona un numero fisso di colonne della tabella.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="pages.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Insert page(s)</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Inserisci pagina(e)</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="pages.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>With this field you can generally create a relation to a page (or more) in TYPO3. This field is used by many of the content element types. If you don't specify a page here, the current page will generally be used.
|
||||
|
||||
Using the "Search" type, the page you insert will be the page to which the search is targeted. You must make sure that this page has a similar "Search" content element (or something similar) to render a search result. Else it makes no sense.
|
||||
|
||||
The "Login" type content element also uses this field to direct the login to a certain page. However that page does not need to contain a Login content element in order to perform the authentication - you can in fact submit a login request to any TYPO3 page and it will be evaluated!
|
||||
If you specify a second page in this list, the id will be passed to the login system as being the page inside TYPO3 where the database of users to look up is found. You should use this only if your template is not configured to pass this value on.
|
||||
In order for the login procedure to work, you must make sure that 1) you have created at least one Website user and member usergroup and is using the correct username and password, 2) you have configured in your TypoScript template on which page (typically a SysFolder) the users can be found - or alternatively have specified this by the second page in the this page list, 3) cookies must be enabled.
|
||||
|
||||
The "Menu/Sitemap" element also uses this field. In that case the page(s) will determine from which point the menu is drawn or maybe even represent the actual pages to which the menu links. All this depends on the subtype of Menu/Sitemap you have selected.
|
||||
|
||||
Finally the "Form" element uses this field as the page to which the form is submitted. You might thus insert a page which is the "Thank you" page of the form mail.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_pages.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:CType,
|
||||
tt_content:recursive</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">tt_content:CType,
|
||||
tt_content:recursive</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="recursive.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Select how many subleves should be additionally selected for each page in the list.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Scegli quanti sottolivelli dovrebbero essere selezionati in aggiunta ad ogni pagina elencata.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="recursive.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Whether this feature makes sense or not depends solely on the template implementation and/or content element type. But basically if this feature is enabled it means that for each page listed in the "Send to page/Starting point" box subpages - to the depth specified here - will <em>also</em> be selected!
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Warning:</strong> If there are many subpages, be aware of this option. It may select an incredible amount of pages then!</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_recursive.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:pages</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">tt_content:pages</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="menu_type.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Select which kind of menu you wish to create.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Seleziona il tipo di menù che vuoi creare.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="menu_type.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>This is a short description of each type:
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Menu of these pages</strong>
|
||||
This will create a list of links to the pages you insert in the Startingpoint list.
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Menu of subpages to these pages</strong>
|
||||
This results in a list of links to the subpages of the pages in the Startingpoint list. If you do not specify a startingpoint, subpages to the current page will be selected.
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Menu of subpages to these pages (with abstract)</strong>
|
||||
Like the previous, but this will include the content of the Abstract field of the pages.
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Menu of subpages to these pages + sections</strong>
|
||||
Like the previous, but including 'submenu' links to all content elements on the page which has the "Index" checkbox set.
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Sitemap</strong>
|
||||
Generates a classic tree sitemap. Maybe your TypoScript template is configured to another design of the sitemap, but anyhow you'll get a sitemap out of this. Notice that the sitemap will begin from the current page unless you specify another "Startingpoint" page in the list below.
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Section index (page content w/Index checked)</strong>
|
||||
This makes a menu to the content elements on this page (or the page specified in the Starting point list). Great way to make an index in the top of the page.
|
||||
Notice that all content elements with the "Index" checkbox set is selected. So if you don't want certain content elements to appear in the list, just un-check the Index checkbox for those elements.
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Recently updated pages</strong>
|
||||
This displays the 10 most recently updated pages.
|
||||
<strong>Notice:</strong> If you update a page and this list seems not to be updated instantly, just clear the cache of the page and the problem is solved.
|
||||
|
||||
<strong>Related pages (based on keywords)</strong>
|
||||
Displays other related pages based on the keywords set for this page matched up with the keywords on other pages.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<b>Notice:</b> With many of the above menu types, the default starting point is the current page. However you can specify another startingpoint (or more than one in fact!) by adding pages to the "Startingpoint" list. See link below.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_menu_type.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:pages,
|
||||
tt_content:sectionIndex</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">tt_content:pages,
|
||||
tt_content:sectionIndex</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="list_type.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Select a plugin to insert.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Seleziona un plugin da inserire.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="list_type.details" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>The list of plugins you can insert on a page. The available plugins depends on which extensions are installed.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">La lista dei plugin che puoi inserire in una pagina. I plugin disponibili dipendono da quali estensioni sono al momento installate.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_list_type.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>_MOD_tools_em</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">_MOD_tools_em</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_list_type.image" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>EXT:context_help/cshimages/ttcontent_7.png</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">EXT:context_help/cshimages/ttcontent_7.png</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="select_key.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter a code string.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Inserisci una stringa codice.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="select_key.details" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Whether or not the content of this field is used and how it's intepreted depends on the context. It is considered obsolete today.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Se il contenuto di questo campo è usato o meno e come è interpretato varia in funzione del contesto. Al momento è considerato superato.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_select_key.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:list_type</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">tt_content:list_type</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="table_bgColor.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Select table background color.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Seleziona il colore di sfondo della tabella.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="table_border.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Select table border thickness.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Seleziona lo spessore dei bordi della tabella.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="table_cellspacing.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Select table cell spacing.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Seleziona il cell spacing della tabella.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="table_cellspacing.details" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Cell spacing is the distance between table cells in rows an columns. The distance is equally applied in all directions, top, bottom, left and right.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Lo spazio della cella è la distanza tra le celle di tabella disposte in righe e colonne. La distanza è applicata uniformemente in tutte le direzioni: sopra, sotto, sinistra e destra.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="table_cellpadding.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Select table cellpadding.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Seleziona il cell padding della tabella.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="table_cellpadding.details" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Cell padding is the 'internal' margin of a table cell. The distance is equally applied in all directions, top, bottom, left and right.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Il Padding della cella (Cell Padding) è una sorta di margine interno di una cella di una tabella. La distanza è uniformementte applicata in tutte le direzioni: sopra, sotto, sinistra e destra.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="media.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Add files to the list here.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Aggiungi files alla lista</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="multimedia.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Insert the multimedia element, eg. a flash movie here.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Inserisci un contenuto multimediale, ad es. un filmato in flash</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="filelink_size.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Check this, if you wish the filesizes to be displayed.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Seleziona se vuoi visualizzare le dimensioni del file.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="records.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Insert relations to records.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Inserisci relazioni ai records.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="spaceBefore.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter the amount of whitespace (in pixels) to insert <em>before</em> this content element.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Digita l'ammontare di spazio (in pixel) da inserire <em>prima</em> dell'elemento di contenuto.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_spaceBefore.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:spaceAfter,
|
||||
tt_content:section_frame</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">tt_content:spaceAfter,
|
||||
tt_content:section_frame</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="spaceAfter.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Enter the amount of whitespace (in pixels) to insert <em>after</em> this content element.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Digita l'ammontare di spazio (in pixel) da inserire <em>dopo</em> l'elemento di contenuto.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_spaceAfter.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:spaceBefore,
|
||||
tt_content:section_frame</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">tt_content:spaceBefore,
|
||||
tt_content:section_frame</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="section_frame.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Select a framing option for the content element.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Seleziona un'opzione di cornice per l'elemento di contenuto.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_section_frame.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="no">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:spaceAfter,
|
||||
tt_content:spaceBefore</source>
|
||||
<target state="needs-translation">tt_content:spaceAfter,
|
||||
tt_content:section_frame</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
78%</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="splash_layout.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Select the design for the Text box.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Seleziona il formato del box di testo.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="splash_layout.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source><strong>Notice:</strong> The Textbox type has a few default renderings but are primarily designed to be used for custom purposes. Therefore the availability of features will depend on the current website template.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_splash_layout.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:CType</source>
|
||||
<target></target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
</trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="sectionIndex.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>If set, the content element will appear in section indices.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Se configurato, l'elemento di contennuto apparirà negli indici di sezione.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="sectionIndex.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>See details for the Menu-type selector (click below).</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_sectionIndex.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="no">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:menu_type</source>
|
||||
<target state="needs-translation">tt_content:list_type</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
80%</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="linkToTop.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>If checked, a little "To top" link will be inserted after the content element.</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Se selezionato un breve link 'Torna su' sarà inserito dopo un contenuto di elemento.</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="rte_enabled.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>If checked, the Rich Text Editor will be disabled for the "Text" and "Text & Image" types (<em>in this element only</em>).</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Se selezionato, l' Editor di Testo Avanzato (RTE) sarà disabilitato per i tipi di contenuto "Testo" e "Testo con Immagini" (<em>solo per questo elemento</em>)</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_rte_enabled.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:bodytext</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">tt_content:bodytext</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="pi_flexform.description" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>FlexForm Configuration of Plugins</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Configurazione dei Plugins via FlexForm</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="pi_flexform.details" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>Some plugins may require configuration of their options. They may use this field for FlexForm based configuration settings (stored as XML).</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">Alcuni plugin potrebbero richiedere una configurazione per le loro opzioni .E' possibile utilizzare questo campo per le loro impostazioni di configurazione basate su FlexForm (salvate come XML)</target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="_pi_flexform.seeAlso" xml:space="preserve" approved="yes">
|
||||
<source>tt_content:list_type</source>
|
||||
<target state="translated">tt_content:list_type</target><note from="developer">This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.</note>
|
||||
<note>This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
This string contains an internal text, which must not be changed. Just copy the original text into the translation field. For more information have a look at the Tutorial.
|
||||
100%</note></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="selected_categories.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Pages or content elements from the selected categories will be displayed in the menu.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="category_field.description" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Choose which category-relation field to refer to.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
<trans-unit id="category_field.details" xml:space="preserve">
|
||||
<source>Depending on your setup there may be more than one field for building relations between categories and pages or content elements. To create a proper selection for the menu, the appropriate field must be chosen.</source>
|
||||
<target></target></trans-unit>
|
||||
</body>
|
||||
</file>
|
||||
</xliff>
|
||||
159
typo3conf/l10n/it/context_help/it.locallang_csh_ttcontent.xml
Normal file
159
typo3conf/l10n/it/context_help/it.locallang_csh_ttcontent.xml
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,159 @@
|
||||
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
|
||||
<T3locallangExt>
|
||||
<data type="array">
|
||||
<languageKey index="it" type="array">
|
||||
<label index=".description">Tutto il contenuto visibile nelle pagine di TYPO3 è costituito tipicamente da records di "Contenuto di Pagina" ("Page Records"). Essi fanno tipicamente riferimento a "Elementi di contenuto". Spesso gli elementi di contenuto sono gestiti dal modulo "Pagina" che è stato progettato per gestire gli elementi di contenuto in colonne multiple e nelle varie lingue.</label>
|
||||
<label index=".details">I records di "Contenuto di Pagina" sono disposti in un certo ordinee pertanto possono essere riposizionati. Nota anche che il selettore "Lingua" e "Colonna" dei records di "Contenuto di pagina" determina dove e in quale situazione deve apparire. Se tu non cambi il valore del selettore "Lingua" e "Colonne" sei maggiormente certo che l'elemento apparirà per default.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="_.image"/>
|
||||
<label index=".image_descr">Il modulo Pagina è usato per gestire gli elementi di Contenuto effettivamente come essi appaiono disposti nelle varie colonne e lingue. Un elemento di contenuto ha numerose opzioni e modalità di modifica. "Tipo" determina quale opzioni sono visibili. Nel frontend -- in una pagina web - un elemento di Contenuto come quello sopra potrebbe apparire allo stesso modo.</label>
|
||||
<label index="CType.description">Seleziona il tipo di contenuto di pagina che l'elemento rappresenta. Nuove opzioni appariranno una volta memorizzato.</label>
|
||||
<label index="CType.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_CType.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="_CType.image">EXT:context_help/cshimages/ttcontent_7.png</label>
|
||||
<label index="hidden.description">Scegli questa opzione se desideri nascondere l'elemento di contenuto in modo che non sia visualizzato.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_hidden.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="starttime.description">Inserisci la data dalla quale l'elemento di contenuto sarà visibile.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_starttime.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="endtime.description">Inserisci la data dalla quale l'elemento di contenuto sparirà dal sito.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_endtime.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="fe_group.description">Seleziona un gruppo del sito web che avrà accesso esclusivo per vedere l'elemento.</label>
|
||||
<label index="fe_group.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_fe_group.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="sys_language_uid.description">Seleziona il linguaggio di sistema per questo elemento. <strong>Attenzione</strong> questa opzione influenza la visibilità dell'elemento.</label>
|
||||
<label index="sys_language_uid.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_sys_language_uid.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="layout.description">Seleziona un layout</label>
|
||||
<label index="layout.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="colPos.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="colPos.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_colPos.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="date.description">Inserisci una data da visualizzare sopra l'header</label>
|
||||
<label index="header.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="header.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_header.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="_header.image">EXT:context_help/cshimages/ttcontent_7.png</label>
|
||||
<label index="header_position.description">Posiziona l'header a sinistra, in centro o a destra.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_header_position.seeAlso">tt_content:pages</label>
|
||||
<label index="header_link.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="header_link.syntax"/>
|
||||
<label index="_header_link.seeAlso">tt_content:pages</label>
|
||||
<label index="header_layout.description">Seleziona un formato per l'header.</label>
|
||||
<label index="header_layout.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_header_layout.seeAlso">tt_content:pages</label>
|
||||
<label index="subheader.description">Inserire una sottotestata (subheader). Questa viene visualizzata sotto il titolo di testa. Se il tipo di contenuto e' "Form" il campo sarà l'email del destinatario.</label>
|
||||
<label index="subheader.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_subheader.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="bodytext.description">Inserisci il testo principale.</label>
|
||||
<label index="bodytext.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_bodytext.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="image.description">Inserisce una o più immagini.</label>
|
||||
<label index="image.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_image.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="_image.image">EXT:context_help/cshimages/ttcontent_7.png</label>
|
||||
<label index="image.image_descr"/>
|
||||
<label index="imagewidth.description">Inserisce la larghezza in pixel dell'immagine.</label>
|
||||
<label index="imagewidth.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_imagewidth.seeAlso">tt_content:imageheight,
|
||||
tt_content:image</label>
|
||||
<label index="imageheight.description">Inserisci l'altezza in pixel dell'immagine.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_imageheight.seeAlso">tt_content:imagewidth,
|
||||
tt_content:image</label>
|
||||
<label index="imageorient.description">Seleziona la posizione delle immagini in relazione al testo principale.</label>
|
||||
<label index="imageorient.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="imageborder.description">Seleziona questo se vuoi un bordo colorato intorno alle immagini.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_imageborder.seeAlso">tt_content:imagecols,
|
||||
tt_content:image</label>
|
||||
<label index="image_noRows.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="image_noRows.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_image_noRows.seeAlso">tt_content:imagecols,
|
||||
tt_content:image</label>
|
||||
<label index="image_link.description">Inserisci un link per le immagini.</label>
|
||||
<label index="image_link.details">Per default tutte le immagini condividono lo stesso link. Tuttavia è possibile configurare il template Typoscript per consentire l'utilizzo di un link separato per ogni immagine. In questo caso i valori dei link vanno separati con una virgola.
|
||||
|
||||
Vedi Page content > Link per maggiori informazioni circa questa sintassi.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_image_link.seeAlso">tt_content:header_link,
|
||||
tt_content:image_zoom,
|
||||
tt_content:image</label>
|
||||
<label index="image_zoom.description">Selezionando questa opzione, cliccando sulle immagini si aprirà una nuova finestra con l'iimagine in dimensioni maggiori.</label>
|
||||
<label index="image_zoom.details">Questa opzione sovrascrive il valore nel campo Link</label>
|
||||
<label index="_image_zoom.seeAlso">tt_content:image_link,
|
||||
tt_content:image</label>
|
||||
<label index="image_effects.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="_image_effects.seeAlso">tt_content:image_compression,
|
||||
tt_content:image_frames,
|
||||
tt_content:image</label>
|
||||
<label index="image_frames.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="_image_frames.seeAlso">tt_content:image_compression,
|
||||
tt_content:image_effects,
|
||||
tt_content:image</label>
|
||||
<label index="image_compression.description">Seleziona le opzioni per la compressione/qualità</label>
|
||||
<label index="_image_compression.seeAlso">tt_content:image_frames,
|
||||
tt_content:image_effects,
|
||||
tt_content:image</label>
|
||||
<label index="imagecols.description">Seleziona il numero di colonne per il blocco immagini</label>
|
||||
<label index="_imagecols.seeAlso">tt_content:image_noRows,
|
||||
tt_content:image</label>
|
||||
<label index="imagecaption.description">Inserisci una didascalia per l'immagine</label>
|
||||
<label index="imagecaption.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_imagecaption.seeAlso">tt_content:imagecaption_position,
|
||||
tt_content:image</label>
|
||||
<label index="imagecaption_position.description">Posiziona la didascalia a sinistra, in centro o a destra.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_imagecaption_position.seeAlso">tt_content:imagecaption,
|
||||
tt_content:image</label>
|
||||
<label index="cols.description">Seleziona un numero fisso di colonne della tabella.</label>
|
||||
<label index="pages.description">Inserisci pagina(e)</label>
|
||||
<label index="pages.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_pages.seeAlso">tt_content:CType,
|
||||
tt_content:recursive</label>
|
||||
<label index="recursive.description">Scegli quanti sottolivelli dovrebbero essere selezionati in aggiunta ad ogni pagina elencata.</label>
|
||||
<label index="recursive.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_recursive.seeAlso">tt_content:pages</label>
|
||||
<label index="menu_type.description">Seleziona il tipo di menù che vuoi creare.</label>
|
||||
<label index="menu_type.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_menu_type.seeAlso">tt_content:pages,
|
||||
tt_content:sectionIndex</label>
|
||||
<label index="list_type.description">Seleziona un plugin da inserire.</label>
|
||||
<label index="list_type.details">La lista dei plugin che puoi inserire in una pagina. I plugin disponibili dipendono da quali estensioni sono al momento installate.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_list_type.seeAlso">_MOD_tools_em</label>
|
||||
<label index="_list_type.image">EXT:context_help/cshimages/ttcontent_7.png</label>
|
||||
<label index="select_key.description">Inserisci una stringa codice.</label>
|
||||
<label index="select_key.details">Se il contenuto di questo campo è usato o meno e come è interpretato varia in funzione del contesto. Al momento è considerato superato.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_select_key.seeAlso">tt_content:list_type</label>
|
||||
<label index="table_bgColor.description">Seleziona il colore di sfondo della tabella.</label>
|
||||
<label index="table_border.description">Seleziona lo spessore dei bordi della tabella.</label>
|
||||
<label index="table_cellspacing.description">Seleziona il cell spacing della tabella.</label>
|
||||
<label index="table_cellspacing.details">Lo spazio della cella è la distanza tra le celle di tabella disposte in righe e colonne. La distanza è applicata uniformemente in tutte le direzioni: sopra, sotto, sinistra e destra.</label>
|
||||
<label index="table_cellpadding.description">Seleziona il cell padding della tabella.</label>
|
||||
<label index="table_cellpadding.details">Il Padding della cella (Cell Padding) è una sorta di margine interno di una cella di una tabella. La distanza è uniformementte applicata in tutte le direzioni: sopra, sotto, sinistra e destra.</label>
|
||||
<label index="media.description">Aggiungi files alla lista</label>
|
||||
<label index="multimedia.description">Inserisci un contenuto multimediale, ad es. un filmato in flash</label>
|
||||
<label index="filelink_size.description">Seleziona se vuoi visualizzare le dimensioni del file.</label>
|
||||
<label index="records.description">Inserisci relazioni ai records.</label>
|
||||
<label index="spaceBefore.description">Digita l'ammontare di spazio (in pixel) da inserire <em>prima</em> dell'elemento di contenuto.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_spaceBefore.seeAlso">tt_content:spaceAfter,
|
||||
tt_content:section_frame</label>
|
||||
<label index="spaceAfter.description">Digita l'ammontare di spazio (in pixel) da inserire <em>dopo</em> l'elemento di contenuto.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_spaceAfter.seeAlso">tt_content:spaceBefore,
|
||||
tt_content:section_frame</label>
|
||||
<label index="section_frame.description">Seleziona un'opzione di cornice per l'elemento di contenuto.</label>
|
||||
<label index="_section_frame.seeAlso">tt_content:spaceAfter,
|
||||
tt_content:section_frame</label>
|
||||
<label index="splash_layout.description">Seleziona il formato del box di testo.</label>
|
||||
<label index="splash_layout.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_splash_layout.seeAlso"/>
|
||||
<label index="sectionIndex.description">Se configurato, l'elemento di contennuto apparirà negli indici di sezione.</label>
|
||||
<label index="sectionIndex.details"/>
|
||||
<label index="_sectionIndex.seeAlso">tt_content:list_type</label>
|
||||
<label index="linkToTop.description">Se selezionato un breve link 'Torna su' sarà inserito dopo un contenuto di elemento.</label>
|
||||
<label index="rte_enabled.description">Se selezionato, l' Editor di Testo Avanzato (RTE) sarà disabilitato per i tipi di contenuto "Testo" e "Testo con Immagini" (<em>solo per questo elemento</em>)</label>
|
||||
<label index="_rte_enabled.seeAlso">tt_content:bodytext</label>
|
||||
<label index="pi_flexform.description">Configurazione dei Plugins via FlexForm</label>
|
||||
<label index="pi_flexform.details">Alcuni plugin potrebbero richiedere una configurazione per le loro opzioni .E' possibile utilizzare questo campo per le loro impostazioni di configurazione basate su FlexForm (salvate come XML)</label>
|
||||
<label index="_pi_flexform.seeAlso">tt_content:list_type</label>
|
||||
<label index="selected_categories.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="category_field.description"/>
|
||||
<label index="category_field.details"/>
|
||||
</languageKey>
|
||||
</data>
|
||||
</T3locallangExt>
|
||||
Reference in New Issue
Block a user